Home Blog Page 2

BEYOND THE LOCAL: High energy bills put some Canadians at risk of heat

0

New study finds many Canadian households may be struggling to pay their energy bills or limit their energy use when they need it most

This article by Runa Das, Royal Roads University and Mari Martiskainen, University of Sussex originally appeared on The Conversation and is published here with permission.

Nearly one in 10 Canadian households spends more than 10% of their income on home heating and cooling, lighting, and storing or cooking food. For these households, the high cost of energy, which includes electricity, natural gas, fuel oil and propane, leads them to ration their consumption and live in fuel poverty.

Energy, in its many forms, plays a vital role in people’s lives. It can provide entertainment, food, and the ability to work, but it also provides essential services, such as heating or air conditioning.

Extreme weather events, such as the 2021 heat dome in Western Canada, are expected to increase in frequency in the future and will amplify the need for these critical energy services. The high energy load of a household could constitute a risk for the life of all the occupants of this house.

Our research shows that some households in Canada spend up to 16% of their budget on energy, almost five times more than those who do not live in energy poverty. This strongly suggests that many households in Canada are struggling to meet their basic energy needs.

Fuel poverty impacts quality of life

Canada — unlike many other countries around the world — does not recognize energy poverty, the lack of adequate and necessary household energy services.

Living in energy poverty means, for example, being too hot or too cold at home, or being stressed by high energy bills. These can have a negative impact on health, relationships and daily life.

Energy poverty usually results from a combination of low income, high energy prices and low energy efficiency. Poorly insulated homes and inefficient appliances increase the cost of energy consumption, particularly affecting low-income people.

Housing costs also have an impact on income available for energy expenditure. Across Canada, many households are struggling to find affordable and adequate housing. And the Bank of Canada’s recent benchmark interest rate hike is the largest in more than two decades. Housing has reached a tipping point, prompting the federal government to introduce a $70 billion National Housing Strategy to reduce homelessness, remove families from housing need and invest in building new homes.

Old and inefficient housing, which has higher energy costs and reduced comfort levels, is a key area of ​​concern. Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation considers housing affordable when it costs less than one-third of a household’s pre-tax income. High energy burden and housing costs can make life less affordable for Canadians.

A danger to life

More and more people are working from home since the pandemic. This has likely increased energy consumption at home, as well as the amount that households spend on energy. Some governments, including that of British Columbia, have provided some relief for electricity bills. The federal government has changed the claim amounts for home office expenses on personal income tax returns if people work more than 50% of the time from home for at least four consecutive weeks. But that may not be enough.

With rising summer temperatures and extreme weather conditions, the use of air conditioning and fans will likely increase, along with energy costs. Toronto, for example, is projected to experience almost 40 very hot days (more than 30°C) by 2050 under a climate scenario where greenhouse gas emissions decline rapidly after 2050. Windsor, Ontario, could face up to 80 very hot days by 2050. in a high-carbon scenario, four times more than the average between 1976 and 2008.

Heat-related deaths are on the rise worldwide. When temperatures reached over 40°C in many parts of British Columbia in late June 2021, 619 people died. Almost all inside, and most lacked adequate cooling systems. Many households avoid using air conditioning in very hot weather because they fear higher electricity bills, and there is a general lack of cooling infrastructure.

As Canada’s inflation rate rises to its fastest pace in 40 years and costs rise across all sectors of the economy, day-to-day living becomes less affordable. Fuel poverty is a real issue for many Canadians, and many more are likely to struggle with rising energy costs in the future.

It is essential that people can have access to energy services such as heating or air conditioning, but they must be affordable. Energy loads should be considered a key factor in Canadian energy policy, as they could be a matter of life and death.

The federal government should start by officially acknowledging the problem of fuel poverty. This has been done in the UK and has enabled the country to begin to address the challenge of fuel poverty.

Runa Das, Associate Professor, College of Interdisciplinary Studies, Royal Roads University and Mari Martiskainen, Senior Researcher, University of Sussex

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Renfrewshire: Concern over the needs of an aging population

0

CAMPAIGNS called for action to help meet the needs of Renfrewshire’s aging population.

A new report shows that the number of people aged 65 and over living in the region has increased over the past decade.

And concerns have been raised about the impact this demographic shift will have on the housing, health, financial and employment needs of older residents.

Adam Stachura, head of policy at Age Scotland, told The Gazette: ‘The consequences of the Covid pandemic, combined with the cost of living crisis, have highlighted the challenges facing older people today’ now and in the future, truly demonstrating that much more national action is needed.

“The Scottish Government should develop a joint strategy to support an aging population as a priority.

“Older people make a gigantic contribution to our society and our economy, but they are hopelessly undervalued.

“Our aging population must be able to live independently and in good health for as long as possible. Access to high quality healthcare and social services, adequate housing, good pensions and flexible employment opportunities all play a key role in helping them do so.

The latest figures released by National Records of Scotland (NRS) show that at the end of June last year a total of 179,940 people lived in Renfrewshire.

This is an increase of 550 over the previous year.

Statistics from the NRS Mid-Year Population Estimates report, which is the first to cover a full year affected by the Covid pandemic, are in line with the long-term trend of a slow increase in Renfrewshire’s population.

A Scottish Government spokesperson said: “Older people in our society have much to offer and contribute and we are committed to supporting them through the actions of our Fairer Scotland for Older People framework.

“We are also working with the Social Isolation and Loneliness Advisory Group to develop our five-year plan to address social isolation.

“We have pledged to increase social care funding by £800million by the end of the current Parliament and the introduction of the National Care Service for Scotland will end the care lottery by postcode, ensuring consistently high standards across the country.”

Ministry of Defense bans imports of 18 major defense platforms, items must be made in India

0


The Ministry of Defense (MoD) revealed to Parliament on Friday the names of eighteen major defense platforms which can no longer be imported. Instead, they will now be locally designed and developed (D&D) by domestic industry.


TO READ THE FULL STORY, SUBSCRIBE NOW FOR JUST RS 249 PER MONTH.

SUBSCRIBE TO PERSPECTIVES


What do you get on Business Standard Premium?


WHERE







Dear reader,

Business Standard has always endeavored to provide up-to-date information and commentary on developments that matter to you and that have wider political and economic implications for the country and the world. Your constant encouragement and feedback on how to improve our offering has only strengthened our resolve and commitment to these ideals. Even in these challenging times stemming from Covid-19, we remain committed to keeping you informed and updated with credible news, authoritative opinions and incisive commentary on relevant topical issues.
However, we have a request.

As we battle the economic impact of the pandemic, we need your support even more so that we can continue to bring you more great content. Our subscription model has received an encouraging response from many of you who have subscribed to our online content. More subscription to our online content can only help us achieve the goals of bringing you even better and more relevant content. We believe in free, fair and credible journalism. Your support through more subscriptions can help us practice the journalism we are committed to.

Support quality journalism and subscribe to Business Standard.

digital editor

First published: Fri, July 22, 2022. 10:15 p.m. IST

Groundswell NZ wants farmers and growers risk $500 fine for not completing Stats NZ agricultural census

0
Groundswell NZ leaders Bryce McKenzie, left, and Laurie Paterson want farmers and producers to boycott the agricultural production census until Statistics NZ agrees to use an emissions measure based on sound science and a warming effect approach.  (File photo)

Robyn Edie / Stuff

Groundswell NZ leaders Bryce McKenzie, left, and Laurie Paterson want farmers and producers to boycott the agricultural production census until Statistics NZ agrees to use an emissions measure based on sound science and a warming effect approach. (File photo)

Groundswell NZ wants farmers to risk a $500 fine for not responding to Statistics NZ’s farm survey.

But Statistics Minister David Clark said having up-to-date, freely accessible agricultural statistics benefits all New Zealanders.

The farmers’ protest group wants farmers and producers to boycott the agricultural production census until Statistics NZ agrees to use an emissions measure based on sound science and a warming effect approach, says- he.

The possible fine for not completing the survey is a maximum of $500.

READ MORE:
* Farm lobby turns into open battle as Groundswell attacks established players
* Groundswell refuses to meet the PM alongside other groups, as ructions surface within the farming faction
* The eight key issues the Groundswell Group is protesting against

Groundswell NZ founder Bryce McKenzie said the boycott was a direct action he could take to pressure the government to reconsider its stubborn commitment to emissions measurement which he said was not working for agriculture or the particular situation of the New Zealand economy.

“Groundswell NZ believes farmers should not be forced to provide data that distorts their emissions. We consider this a just and justified protest action,” he said.

The emissions metric used in the survey, called GWP100, overestimates the impact of agricultural emissions by 400%, as found in a study by an Oxford professor, and is one of the main reasons cited by those who want to punish farmers and producers for their emissions, he said.

“When it comes to emissions, agriculture is a different type of activity than the rest of the economy, because of the methane replacement cycle,” he said.

Statistics Minister David Clark said having up-to-date, freely accessible agricultural statistics benefits all New Zealanders.  (File photo)

ROBERT KITCHIN/Stuff

Statistics Minister David Clark said having up-to-date, freely accessible agricultural statistics benefits all New Zealanders. (File photo)

“If farmers were to meet the government’s 10% reduction target, there would be a net chilling effect.”

Statistics Minister David Clark said Stats NZ uses internationally recommended and accepted methodologies for GHG emissions statistics.

Stats NZ did not respond to questions about the impact of not completing the census.

A spokesperson for Stats NZ said the aim of the Agricultural Production Census was to collect data on agricultural production and practices to create timely, quality and comprehensive national agricultural statistics.

1 NEWS

He Waka Eke Noa recommends a split-gas approach to apply different levies on individual farms – by Benedict Collins.

It takes place every five years and is administered by Stats NZ in partnership with the Department of Primary Industries

Nearly 60,000 agricultural businesses are surveyed, including farmers, commercial growers and forest owners.

The survey asks participants about their production, land use and practices for the 2021-22 year ending June 30, 2022.

Clark County Mosquito Control District works to reduce mosquito population

0

The Reflector

The mosquito population this year is higher than usual in Clark County despite a mild mosquito season in 2021.

The Clark County Mosquito Control District has been working to reduce the population since April and is continually working to reduce numbers in areas with high mosquito concentrations across the county.

Mosquito species active in Clark County lay their eggs in moist soil along rivers in late spring and early summer. Once the snow on the mountains melted and the water level rose, these areas became covered in water and the eggs hatched, the statement said.

Since the spring and summer seasons were mostly dry in 2021, there were lower water levels and fewer mosquito eggs hatching as a result. This year, the county faced record rainfall, which caused the Columbia River to reach flood stage in June, the statement said. As hundreds of acres around local rivers flooded, mosquito eggs hatched, including eggs that did not hatch last year.

“All of these conditions peaking at the same time created this year’s perfect storm,” Clark County Mosquito Control District Manager Mario Boisvert said in the statement.

This spring, the district used a helicopter to treat more than 1,600 acres of mosquito breeding grounds with larvicide. Technicians are also working to set up traps to identify areas with large populations of adult mosquitoes and to use trucks to treat those areas.

According to the release, the district is currently working on more than 300 service requests over the past three weeks.

The statement also said Mosquito Control District technicians were treating thousands of catch basins across the county to prevent the outbreak of mosquitoes that may carry West Nile virus. Technicians trap adult mosquitoes in these areas to contain the virus. Clark County has never had a positive test result in a mosquito sample, although the virus has been detected in mosquitoes from other parts of the state, the statement said.

Mosquito species currently active in Clark County do not carry human disease, but their bites can cause discomfort. Clark County Public Health urges residents to avoid mosquito bites by following these steps:

  • Install or repair screens on windows or doors.
  • If possible, stay indoors at dawn and dusk, when mosquitoes are most active.
  • When possible, wear long-sleeved shirts, long pants, shoes, socks, and hats outdoors, especially in wooded or wet areas.
  • Place a mosquito net over the baby carriers when you are outside.
  • Use EPA-registered insect repellents like those containing DEET, picaridin, IR3535, or oil of lemon eucalyptus. To be used especially at dawn and dusk. Read the label carefully and follow the instructions for applying repellents, especially when applying to children.

The release says Clark County residents can also prevent mosquitoes from breeding on their property by following these steps:

  • Drain standing water from old tires, flower pots, buckets, plastic sheeting and wheelbarrows.
  • Change the water in birdbaths, ponds, wading pools, bowls and pet waterers at least twice a week.
  • Fix leaky faucets and sprinklers and clean out clogged gutters.
  • Properly maintain swimming pools.
  • Check for containers or trash in hard-to-see places, such as under bushes.

The Clark County Mosquito Control District will continue to monitor the county through the end of September, the release said.

For more information, visit clark.wa.gov/public-health/mosquito-control-district.

CT college system cuts costs amid falling enrollment revenue

0

Connecticut state college and university system officials are planning cost-cutting measures in the coming year to combat revenue losses from declining enrollment.

The measures – which include curtailing programs and leaving vacancies unfilled after retirements – are controversial among some faculty, many of whom believe the way to improve enrollment is not through cuts but strengthening student programs and services. According to them, the problems within the finances of the system begin with a lack of state support.

“Teachers have felt the impact [cost-cutting measures]so do students,” said Brendan Cunningham, professor of economics at Eastern Connecticut State University.

The state’s public higher education system, which has a budget of about $1.5 billion, has been mired in financial difficulties for years, including at Western Connecticut State University where President John Clark recently resigned following a vote of no confidence by the faculty senate earlier this year.

“We need to be more efficient and effective in how we allocate resources that are commensurate with outcomes, impact and ultimately student achievement,” CSCU spokesperson Leigh Appleby said in a statement. an email. “We’re just not where we want to be right now, and major change is needed if we hope to not just survive, but ultimately thrive.”

Appleby cited several improvements to programs and grants, including the implementation of the Guided Pathway program which he said is expected to have a “dramatic impact on student retention and enrollment.” Guided Pathway aims to streamline student pathways through college.

With the exception of Charter Oak State College, all schools in the system are forecasting a balanced budget for fiscal year 2023. Charter Oak expects a loss of $1.2 million due to some one-time program start-up costs and the payment schedule for the SEBAC agreement, according to a June presentation to the Board of Regents.

Part of this balanced budget came from approximately $300 million in one-time funding from the state’s American Rescue Plan Act which covered an additional pay period, which cost around $18.4 million. Central State Connecticut University, for example, would have had a shortfall of just over $1 million without the one-time funding.

The Board of Regents has increased tuition and compulsory fees for the 2022-2023 fiscal year for full-time community college students paying out of pocket by $112 per semester and for state universities and college students. Charter Oak from $291 per semester.

The system projected a budget shortfall of more than $250 million between fiscal year 2022 and fiscal year 2023 due to increases in staff, benefits, extra pay period, and decrease in registrations due to COVID-19, according to CSCU.

The system is also undergoing a merger of its 12 community colleges into one, which will move hundreds of employees to new positions, titles and organizations.

A 2021 report attributed the “weakened” performance of the state system from 2016 to 2019 to a decline in revenue from state appropriations and some non-university services, such as student housing and catering, combined with an increase non-personal costs.

The report, compiled by two professors for the American Association of University Teachers, looked at data from 2013 to 2020. Last year saw a drop in income partly due to the pandemic.

“Overall, despite the decline in performance, CSVSU System has sufficient reserves to offset losses due to the pandemic,” the report said. “The long-term decline in enrollment is concerning, but can primarily be managed through staff attrition.”

At its last meeting, the Board of Regents adopted a spending plan that includes cost-cutting measures. Among these measures are program cuts and reductions.

For example, in June the board approved the discontinuation of the gerontology certificate program at Central CT State University.

While not all programs need to make money, university officials are considering their solvency under the latest spending plan, said CSCU chief financial officer Ben Barnes.

“There are some programs that we would like to review and leave because they are chronically under-enrolled and don’t seem to meet the needs of our students now,” Barnes said in a recent interview. “We are interested in providing attractive programs for students and helping them achieve their educational goals. If not, we need to change these programs or withdraw from them.

Cunningham said the system “puts the cart before the horse” with this method. He said much of the lost revenue was attributed to declining enrollment, but the subsequent reduction in the program could lead to further loss of enrollment.

It also leads to an increased workload for some professors, he said.

He thinks the state should invest more in higher education. The percentage of system revenue coming from the state has declined by several percentage points from 1987 to 2020, Cunningham said.

“We don’t give them [students] what we were doing before,” he added.

Some schools in the system’s cost-cutting plan choose to capitalize on a wave of retirements by not filling vacancies to save money. System-wide, there were nearly 730 full-time employee retirements in fiscal year 2022, approximately 14% of total full-time positions.

“We are obviously in the process of filling a number of positions,” Barnes said. “But some campuses have indicated they are looking for ways to capture that attrition as permanent savings.”

Rotua Lumbantobing, associate professor of economics and president of the American Association of University Presidents chapter at Western Connecticut State University, said the decision not to fill the positions is hurting staff morale.

Morale took another hit when a report on Western’s finances was released, she added.

“Faculty and staff are very often, very upset,” Lumbantobing said. “They no longer trust the administration.

“Serious financial difficulties” at Western

The January report of the National Center for Higher Education Management Systems said Western was in “severe financial difficulties” and had dipped into its reserves almost every year for the past decade. The report, which faculty dispute, notes declining enrollment and high spending, particularly on staff.

“The time has come to address the University’s fiscal issues, not only because WCSU has depleted its reserves, but because demographic trends in Connecticut and the Northeastern United States are no longer generally favorable” , says the report. “Postponing action means the problem to be solved will be even bigger than it is now.”

Lumbantobing said the professors disputed the report’s findings. Enrollments fell in all areas, not just Western, she said.

She says listeners should have interviewed more people — especially faculty and staff — and questioned the methods used to create the report. She wants to see more transparency from the administration about the data used to create the report, she added.

And The financial problems can be attributed to administrative decisions as well as a lack of state support, she said.

“The bottom line is that the state has to support us, to support Connecticut State University. And, the second is that bad decisions were made. It’s not just local administrators. Yes, it’s true that of course they made a lot of bad decisions and that put us in this dire situation. But they also had system office support.

The WCSU Senate in May took a vote of no confidence in then-president John Clark after a retirement intended to solve some of the financial problems. Clark officially resigned as president on July 14.

“Since assuming the role of WCSU President in 2015, Dr. Clark has demonstrated his commitment to public higher education,” CSCU President Terrence Cheng wrote in a message to the university community.

The idea that poor management is to blame for Western’s problems is not consistent with the NCHEMS report, Appleby said.

“However, from a system-wide perspective, we need to change if we are to adapt to the needs of the 21st century and provide the kind of educational experience that traditional and non-traditional students seek, especially since they continue to seek fulfilling experiences and lucrative careers in Connecticut businesses and industries,” Appleby said in a statement emailed Monday.

Aligning vaccinations with new census numbers fixes obvious errors but lowers rates for city

0

A municipal drop box is set up to receive census forms in 2021. (Photo: Electoral Commission)

Cambridge’s updated population figures based on the 2020 census have deflated the city’s vaccination performance against Covid-19, with slightly lower vaccination percentages overall, but larger drops in vaccination figures. vaccination for certain age and racial and ethnic groups. The city used the updated numbers for the first time on Thursday, creating a different vaccination picture overnight.

Cambridge’s population has grown from 105,162 in 2010 to 118,403 in 2020, according to a Census Bureau announcement in August. Yet until now Cambridge Public Health had used lower population estimates from 2019 to calculate the percentage of Cambridge residents and those in demographic subgroups with at least one vaccine, fully vaccinated and boosted. Cambridge’s total population has been pegged at 111,989, which is 6,414 less than the 2020 figure.

These figures come from the state Department of Public Health, which delayed using the 2020 Census figures because it was concerned that Census Bureau adjustments to protect individuals’ privacy could “distort the data” when ‘they’re used to calculate rates and percentages,’ an official said last year.

Now the state is providing vaccination numbers to Cambridge and other communities based on a higher population. The new figures adopt the Census Bureau’s total population count of 118,403 for Cambridge, but it is unclear whether the demographic breakdown is different from the 2020 census figures.

It had been evident for months that some of the vaccination percentages in the city’s Covid-19 dashboard were wrong because the population numbers were too low – some age groups had more people vaccinated than the total number of this age group. For example, last October, the dashboard showed that there were more residents over the age of 75 who had received at least one vaccine than the total population over the age of 75. The gaps only widened as more and more people got vaccinated. This month, there were more teenagers aged 12 to 15 reported fully vaccinated than the total for that age group.

Since Thursday, this is no longer true. And the calculation means that the percentage of vaccinated has decreased. The decline was slight for Cambridge’s total population fully vaccinated – to 73% with the updated population figures, compared to 76% before the changes.

The impact of changes in certain demographic groups is greater. For example, after the switch, the proportion of fully immunized black residents fell to 77% from 84%; Hispanic residents at 56% vs. 69%; and Asians at 68% versus 73%.

Cambridge Public Health Department spokeswoman Dawn Baxter said the drop in vaccination rates for non-white residents was expected, since the 2020 census showed the population increasing for all demographic groups at the exception of white residents. Baxter said the health department continues to “target groups that may have greater barriers to access, and we’re confident we’re reaching a diverse group of residents.” Data as of 7/18/2022 indicates that of the vaccines the CPHD has administered to date, Hispanic, Black, and multiracial residents represent proportions equal to or greater than their representation of the city’s population.

The city’s announcement of the change noted the slight decreases in vaccination percentages for the total population and highlighted that there had been no change in the number of residents vaccinated. The more accurate population figures also mean more Cambridge residents have not been vaccinated.

For example, the updated figures correspond to nearly 32,000 Cambridge residents not fully vaccinated. Before the change, the number of people reported as not fully immune was around 26,000.

Infections and cases

In other coronavirus changes and developments, some nursing homes and assisted living facilities in the city recently reported more infections among residents and staff, and a resident of a long-term care facility without name died of the virus, according to Thursday’s report from the city. .

Tests whose results are reported to health authorities continue to fall sharply, following the global trend. There were 8,388 tests in Cambridge in the two weeks ending July 9, compared to 30,916 in the first two weeks of May, according to the city’s Covid-19 dashboard. Yet the percentage of people testing positive remained well above 7%; at the start of the pandemic, some public health experts said a positivity rate above 5% meant there was not enough testing.

The reported numbers have become a less reliable sign of transmission levels as more people use rapid home tests and do not report results to public health agencies, city health officials said. Virus levels in Cambridge sewage, which are not based on individual test results, show rising levels recently in three of the four wards.

Warning that tents should not become a new norm as refugees arrive at Gormanston camp

0

Each military tent will accommodate 16 people with separate showers and toilets, leisure and canteen facilities, Mr O’Gorman told RTÉ. It was a short-term measure where people would be housed for a “maximum” week, he said.

Tented accommodation could also be added to existing facilities across the country for asylum seekers to meet any potential surge in demand, O’Gorman said.

He also said a second reception center for refugees would open in “the next two to three weeks”.

Some 3,000 units in institutional buildings have been identified for refurbishment by local authorities and donated to the Housing Department to provide accommodation for refugees. The first tranche of 500 places will be handed over this week, which will further reduce growing accommodation pressure for refugees, Mr O’Gorman said.

Over the weekend, 780 refugees and asylum seekers were accommodated at the Citywest Hotel in Dublin, he told RTÉ. No one had to sleep in Dublin Airport’s old terminal over the weekend, as had happened a few days earlier, he said.

There have been 43,256 arrivals from Ukraine to Ireland since the start of the war until the week ending July 10, according to new figures from the Central Statistics Office.

Additionally, some 7,080 applicants for international protection arrived in Ireland this year while in 2021 only 2,648 applicants arrived.

“Tents must not become a new standard”

Refugee and migrant support organization Doras is concerned that refugees are sleeping on the ground and in tents and that this could signal a worrying new normal if not immediately addressed.

John Lannon, CEO of Irish migrant rights NGO Doras, said: ‘[P]People need and deserve better than sleeping on the ground or in tents. file picture

Doras CEO John Lannon said a basic accommodation standard is essential to meet our obligations to some of the world’s most vulnerable people.

“We are talking about people fleeing for their lives, people who have lived through the horrors of war and are looking for a safe place of rest and refuge,” Mr. Lannon said.

“While many of those we work with are grateful for any type of immediate food and shelter, the reality is that people need and deserve better than sleeping on the ground or in tents.

“This is particularly the case for people who have been traumatized or have specific medical needs, and in all situations the protection of children is paramount. This is the case for Ukrainians as well as for people from Afghanistan and others who need protection.

“Of course we have a national housing crisis, and have had for years, but we are still a wealthy country and we need to provide a basic standard of care and accommodation that does not allow people to sleep in extremely inadequate conditions.

The risk here is that tents become a new norm and we cannot allow that, especially as we enter the final weeks of summer and face the prospect of a long, cold winter ahead.

“We have known for many months now, since the government signaled that up to 100,000 Ukrainian refugees could arrive, that measures should be put in place.

“Everyone involved is working hard, but it’s just not enough to say we didn’t see this coming.

“The situation is also aggravating the distress felt by those on direct offer, which as we know is already a substandard accommodation system. Direct offer was itself a so-called temporary measure, introduced as early as 2000 in due to a shortage of housing.

“The recent white paper acknowledged the failures and the need to end this system, but now things look set to get worse rather than better, with the current failures adding to the acute pressure felt by people in this terrible system.

There are now 4,000 people who should be able to leave direct supply but find nowhere to live and this number is growing day by day.

“All of this underscores the need for a new level of urgency when it comes to tackling the national housing emergency.”

“We call for greater leadership and common thinking, especially with regard to coordination between the national and local levels. Alongside our industry colleagues, we have met with the Taoiseach and raised this issue on several occasions.”

“We need better coordination and resources to ensure that those of us who work with refugees and asylum seekers can better respond to the enormous levels of distress and suffering we witness every day.

“We need a comprehensive response, as we did with Covid, which should include the appointment of a national refugee response manager.

“We also need to see a government plan that articulates an approach to welcoming and accommodating refugees that does not rely on tents or other substandard accommodation.

“A key part of the necessary response, as demanded by the Ukrainian Civil Society Forum, is to mandate the Housing Agency to lead medium-term housing development for refugees.”

The Need to Go Beyond Medication Adherence in the Medicare Population

0

Adherence to medication isn’t the only area to focus on for seniors covered by Medicare. Optimizing access to treatments and medicines is also important.

For any health plan, keeping members healthy is a big part of making sure they receive optimal treatments. This particularly concerns the elderly, in whom the wrong medicine or the wrong dose, or the use of unnecessary medicines, can lead to dangerous consequences, such as an increased risk of falls and hospitalization.1

Compared to the general population, older adults have a higher incidence of medication overload, where medication use causes more harm than good.2 Additionally, they are hospitalized for adverse drug events at a higher rate than the general population is hospitalized for opioids.2.3 These trends make it critical to ensure that older adults take the safest and most effective medications and adhere to prescribed regimens.

However, plan administrators who focus too narrowly on adherence may miss factors that pose barriers to accessing medications and optimizing health in older adults. In many cases, the socioeconomic and behavioral aspects of drug optimization are as important as the clinical aspects.4 This is especially true for elderly patients and people from racial and ethnic minorities, both of whom have historically faced structural and economic barriers that compound health problems – a serious problem that has become more evident during the pandemic. of COVID-19.

A Commonwealth Fund survey found that older Latino and black adults were more than twice as likely to report economic hardship related to COVID-19 compared to white patients, and overall the proportion of older adults who said they had exhausted their savings or lost their jobs during the pandemic was 4 to 6 times higher in the United States than in many other developed countries.5

The pandemic has also exacerbated the challenge of ensuring access to care for chronic conditions. In the same survey, 37% of seniors with 2 or more conditions reported canceling or rescheduling an appointment with a provider due to COVID-19.5 Another study found that 36% of black seniors and 39% of Latino seniors experienced a pandemic-related medical care disruption, compared to 31% of white adults in the same age group.6 These statistics underscore the importance of identifying those for whom adequate disease management means ensuring access to transportation, home care and/or drug delivery services. Additionally, language and cultural barriers combined with the complexity of medications underscore the importance of taking a holistic approach.

For any health insurance plan, the stakes are higher than just improving its star rating. A plan must not only provide members with the resources they need to stay safe and healthy, whether in the form of “whole person” home health care, educational programs or members with housing services; it must also be able to identify the members likely to benefit from such measures. Effective use of technology can address the complex web of factors that affect a person’s health care. Sophisticated, configurable algorithms that encompass social determinants of health such as age, ethnicity, and socioeconomic status enable targeted health planning and advice for individuals based on their specific needs. Driven by advanced artificial intelligence technologies, these algorithms can ensure that members are not only taking the right medications at the right dose, but also receiving culturally appropriate and inclusive care.

The urgency of optimizing medications among Medicare Advantage enrollees is underscored by the rapidly growing elderly population, with the number of Americans ages 65 and older expected to reach 80 million by 2040, when the number of people aged 85 and over is expected to nearly quadruple from 2000 levels.seven To ensure equitable care for this growing population, CMS has released a Health Equity Framework, a blueprint for designing and implementing policies and programs to eliminate avoidable health disparities.8 The approach places particular emphasis on chronic and infectious diseases (e.g., diabetes, COVID-19), which disproportionately affect members of historically underserved communities. CMS shares system and community-level strategies, including robust data and infrastructure systems; engage effectively with individuals, families, and caregivers as partners in their health care; and integrating population health efforts into measurement and payment.

The solution lies in adopting technology-enabled systems approaches to effectively and sustainably address health inequities. This means going beyond measuring immediate quality results; indeed, the well-being of the nation depends on the possibility of sustainable improvements in health, as evidenced by accessible and value-based care that ensures the safety, health and prosperity of our elderly populations.

References

1. Thomas EJ, Brennan TA. Incidence and types of preventable adverse events in elderly patients: population-based medical record review. BMJ. 2000;320(7237):741-744. doi:10.1136/bmj.320.7237.741.

2. Garber J, Brownlee S. Drug overload: America’s other drug problem. The Lown Institute. Published April 2019. https://lowninstitute.org/wp-content/uploads/2019/08/medication-overload-lown-web.pdf

3. Health Care Cost and Utilization Project (HCUP) Quick Statistics. Agency for Research and Quality in Health. Published in 2018. https://datatools.ahrq.gov/hcup-fast-stats.

4. Wilder ME et al. The impact of social determinants of health on medication adherence: a systematic review and meta-analysis. J Gen Med Intern. 2021;36(5):1359-1370. doi: 10.1007/s11606-020-06447-0.

5. Williams RD, Shah A, Doty MM, Fields K, FitzGerald M. The impact of COVID-19 on older adults. The Commonwealth Fund. September 2021. https://www.commonwealthfund.org/publications/surveys/2021/sep/impact-covid-19-older-adults

6. Guerrero LR, Wallace SP. The impact of COVID-19 on diverse older adults and health equity in the United States. Public Health Front. Published online May 17, 2021;9:661592. doi:10.3389/fpubh.2021.661592

7. The American population is aging. Urban Institute. Published in 2022. https://www.urban.org/policy-centers/cross-center-initiatives/program-retirement-policy/projects/data-warehouse/what-future-holds/us-population-aging

8. CMS Framework for Health Equity. CMS. Published 2022. Updated April 22, 2022. https://www.cms.gov/About-CMS/Agency-Information/OMH/equity-initiatives/framework-for-health-equity

The MQM-P demands a new census, the delimitation of constituencies based on the results of the census

0

After inaugurating the electoral office for the upcoming by-election in National Assembly Constituency NA 245, former Mayor of Karachi and deputy organizer of MQM-Pakistan Waseem Akhtar demanded that the elections of local bodies which were to be held in Karachi and Hyderabad on July 24 be postponed. .

“I think local body elections should be postponed. If the boundaries of constituencies were corrected, then free and fair elections would be possible. However, the population of CUs in our traditional constituencies is high as rural areas have been incorporated into urban areas. We have already approached the court and the electoral commission to find solutions,” he said in an interview with reporters.

The MQM-P demanded a new census and the delimitation of constituencies based on the results of the census. The former mayor said the residents of NA-245 have been associated with his party since its inception and that this area had been one of the party’s strongholds.

This area was badly hit during the 1992 operation where people made sacrifices for the party, and residents of the constituency were imprisoned and martyred for fighting for their rights, he said. .

Akhtar said that the people of NA-245 would choose MQM-Pakistan again in the by-election because they knew it was the only party that in every forum raised its voice for the people of Karachi. “We have made agreements with parties at the national level to solve people’s problems here.”

Akhtar said the candidate Moeed Anwar his party fielded was a resident of the area. Anwar was a former district chairman and worked for MQM-P for a long time, he added.

Under Anwar’s leadership, the former mayor said, he had done many development projects in this area and if the party won the by-elections, he would work harder than he had done in the past.

Bulawayo struggles to clear housing backlog

0

BULAWAYO City Council (BCC) plans to service 650 medium density stalls in Mahatshula and 453 high density stalls in Luveve suburb as it struggles with a housing backlog of over 120,000.

The housing backlog has increased over the years due to population growth.

A 2012 census put the town’s population at just over 650,000, but the local authority says there are over 1.5 million people in the country’s second-largest city.

Latest council minutes show that the BCC has issued a tender to develop stalls in Mahatshula and Luveve.

“The procurement strategy used is expression of interest or tenders. Due to the growing housing backlog in the city, the city of Bulawayo has invited companies to submit proposals for housing development residential properties in Luveve and Mahatshula Township,” the minutes read.

The council says the plans are in line with the council’s corporate strategy and the government’s economic plan, the National Development Strategy 1 (NDS 1).

“With respect to expressions of interest, promoters must fully maintain the stands that would be made available to them with their own funds and recover their funds from the proceeds of the sale of the stands,” the minutes add.

“Stands are to be sold to beneficiaries on the Council’s waiting list after maintenance has been completed, after which the developer would get their money back, with the Council getting the intrinsic value of the land from the proceeds of stall sales. “

The Council recently serviced 267 stands at Emganwini.

Bulawayo needs up to 27,000 hectares of land inside and outside its boundaries to meet the land needs of its residents and industry under an ongoing development strategy through 2034.

This is according to a review of Bulawayo’s operational master plan by independent consultants, Job Jika and Associates, which indicates that only 12,350 hectares are available for development.

The current operational master plan is over 20 years old and was prepared in 2000 as a revision to the 1982 master plan under the Planning Act 1976.

The main development proposals contained in the operational master plan of 2000 involve the redevelopment of the old transport terminus Egodini and Makokoba, among others.

The proposals also cite the need to develop large commercial/business parks, build more primary and secondary schools, clinics, hospitals, police stations and large industrial establishments.

The Egodini Mall is failing to take off several years after a South African contractor, civil engineering firm Terracotta Trading (Private) Limited, won the tender to turn the former Basch Street Terminus into a regional public transport hub in 2012.

Weekend Reading: Population Growth | South Seattle Emerald

0

by Kevin Schofield


Reading this weekend is a new report from the United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs that predicts global population growth for the rest of this century.

The total population of our planet is expected to reach 8 billion next November. Since 1974, when we reached 5 billion, we have consistently added another billion every 11 to 13 years. Along with this came warnings of the disastrous consequences of unchecked population growth: a world that would not be able to house all of its inhabitants, let alone feed, clothe and shelter them.

All of this is changing. The latest prediction from the UN is that we won’t reach 9 billion people until around 2040 – 18 years from now – and we will hit the 10 billion mark around 2060, 20 years later. Shortly thereafter, the world’s population will peak at around 10.4 billion and then begin to decline.

Now, it’s fair to point out that these are model predictions, and there’s a decent amount of variability in them: the population could continue to grow to 12 billion by 2100, or decrease to less than 9 billion. But the models are not that complicated and, in fact, there are only a small handful of variables that control them.

One of them, of course, is life expectancy. In 2019 (pre-COVID), global life expectancy reached 72.8 years, a dramatic increase of about nine years from 1990. It is expected to continue increasing to about 77 years. by 2050, as living conditions improve for low-income people. income countries.

Another key variable is the fertility rate: how many children does a person capable of procreation have, on average, during their lifetime? In 1950, it was five births; last year it had fallen to 2.3 and by 2050 it is expected to be around 2.1. This is strongly influenced by income and education levels, but also more generally by healthcare standards and the control people have over their own reproductive decisions.

But there’s another factor that doesn’t require guesswork; it only requires mathematical modelling: how many people of childbearing age are there in the world. Due to historically low life expectancies in some of the world’s most populous countries, the UN globally rates the world’s population as quite young. But with increasing life expectancy, over time the population as a whole will age and the percentage of people who can have children will decrease. The UN predicts that by 2050, the number of people over 65 will be more than double the number of children under 5 and roughly equal to the number under 12. Combine that with the fact that life expectancy won’t continue to increase indefinitely – people will live longer, but eventually die – and the rate of population growth of the past few decades simply cannot be sustained.

Now, although this is the situation globally, there are huge differences when we look country by country, and this is likely to have significant geopolitical impacts in the years to come. For example: China has for many years been the most populous country in the world, closely followed by India. But the effects of China’s recently abandoned “one-child” policy are now clear, and next year India is set to overtake China as the largest country.

In fact, the UN report predicts that more than half of the increase in the world’s population over the next 30 years will be concentrated in eight countries: the Democratic Republic of Congo, Egypt, Ethiopia, l India, Nigeria, Pakistan, the Philippines and the United Republic of Tanzania. At the same time, most high-income countries have significantly lower fertility rates – many below “replacement level” – and will reach their population peak much earlier.

Some of these changes have already taken place. According to the UN report, for high-income countries between 2000 and 2020, population growth was driven more by net migration from other countries (about 80.5 million people) than by a surplus of births over deaths (about 66.2 million). In low-income countries, population growth refers to births and deaths; in high-income countries, they are people from other countries. The UN does not expect this to change in the coming years. Although in the short term, recent events may mask the magnitude of this effect: the war in Syria has resulted in a substantial amount of net migration to the Middle East and Europe, but on the other hand, blockages linked to the COVID-19 have severely restricted many migrations. patterns.

For those who revere the feet of sustained economic growth, there will be dramatic changes in the years to come. In most parts of the world, economic growth is still driven by human labour; when the working population begins to shrink – as is already the case in Japan, for example – the economy is likely to follow.

The UN report is 50 pages of fascinating charts and discussions of both the “big picture” of global population growth and close-up views of how things will vary across countries and regions. regions. Conventional wisdom about world population is quickly proving wrong, and as we enter the midpoint of this century, it will undoubtedly upend the global geopolitical order.

World Population Prospects 2022: Summary of Findings


Kevin Schofield is a freelance writer and the founder of Seattle City Council Overview, a website providing independent information and analysis about the Seattle City Council and City Hall. He also co-hosts the “Seattle News, Views and Brews” podcast with Brian Callanan, and appears occasionally on Converge Media and KUOW’s Week in Review.

📸 Featured image by Arthimedes/Shutterstock.com.

Before you move on to the next story …
Please consider that the article you just read was made possible by the generous financial support of donors and sponsors. The Emerald is a BIPOC-led nonprofit news outlet with the mission of offering a wider lens of our region’s most diverse, least affluent, and woefully under-reported communities. Please consider making a one-time gift or, better yet, joining our Rainmaker Family by becoming a monthly donor. Your support will help provide fair pay for our journalists and enable them to continue writing the important stories that offer relevant news, information, and analysis. Support the Emerald!

Stratford council hopes to point out serious concerns about the municipal voters list

0

Stratford council candidate Ken Wood has a long list of issues he wants to address when campaigning for a town hall seat.

Content of the article

Stratford council candidate Ken Wood has a long list of issues he wants to address when campaigning for a town hall seat.

Advertisement 2

Content of the article

At the top of this list so far?

Well, it’s actually another list – the one that keeps track of the city’s eligible voters.

Gaps in the data used to create municipal voter rolls became a concern for Wood early in the campaign, his second in Stratford. An avid observer of council meetings from his home in one of the city’s new affordable housing buildings, Wood, 73, stumbled upon the problem when he visited voterlookup.ca to confirm he was on the list. .

To his surprise, Wood found no, and neither did his neighbors. The Britannia Street building opened in 2019, a year after the last municipal elections.

“I was shocked,” Wood said Friday. “I just had blind … faith that the voters list was accurate. I didn’t really understand how inaccurate that was until this election happened.

“I’m a senior, I have a low pension, I’ve been on ODSP, so I know what it’s like to live on low income,” Wood added. “This particular segment of the population tends to be vastly underrepresented among people who vote. There are many reasons for this, the main reason being the accuracy of the voting list.

Unlike the provincial and federal lists managed by Elections Ontario and Elections Canada, the Municipal Property Assessment Corporation – the not-for-profit organization that assesses and classifies all properties in Ontario – is responsible for municipal voters lists before they are released. be handed over to local authorities. for final updates approximately two months before Election Day.

Advertisement 3

Content of the article

MPAC keeps preliminary listings up to date through its property assessment database and self-reporting tools like voterlookup.ca, but critics have argued for years that landlord data is far more reliable. than tenant data.

The Association of Municipal Managers, Clerks and Treasurers of Ontario (AMCTO) is among those advocating for change. In multiple statements on the conduct of municipal elections in the province, the group points out that the inaccuracy of voter lists has been a concern since at least 2012.

“The voters list in Ontario is plagued with inaccuracies and, despite previous promises of reform, has remained a thorn in the side of election administrators across the province and a constant source of frustration for voters,” reads a message on the AMCTO website. “Neither the use of new technology nor the willingness to explore new voting methods has changed the reality that every four years municipalities will receive a deeply flawed voters list.”

Carmelo Lipsi, MPAC’s chief operating officer, said his organization had tried to address the issue, first through mailings to landlords and tenants, then more recently through campaigns on social networks. One problem, Lipsi said, is that renters tend to move more often than landlords, and those address changes aren’t automatically recorded.

“When you own and move, we have all of that information provided to us at the time of registration,” he said. “Tenants don’t always think it’s something they really have to do. This is an area we spend time thinking about because we want to make sure the resources we make available to everyone are as easy and transparent as possible.

Advertisement 4

Content of the article

Changes are on the horizon. Legislative changes passed in 2020 will create a single register of municipal voters managed by Elections Ontario, which already maintains a similar database for provincial elections.

“We are optimistic that with the Single Register of Electors, due in 2024, some of the concerns about accuracy, including tenant data, will be resolved and will be continuously improved over time,” a gatekeeper said. word of the AMCTO.

Stratford clerk Tatiana Dafoe said city officials expect to receive the city’s preliminary voters list on September 1. This is when local officials can begin accepting change requests if voters have not already submitted updated information to MPAC.

In the meantime, however, Wood worries that the extra steps many tenants will have to take to vote could create a barrier to democracy for a significant number of people.

“If you’re not on the list in the first place and you go to vote and you find that’s a problem…people walk away,” he said. “I think it’s an unintended consequence, (but the system) actually disenfranchises a lot of people.”

Nearly 11,700 people voted in Stratford’s last election, around 50% of those who were eligible. It’s unclear how many were tenants, but the Advocacy Center for Tenants Ontario estimates that more than 30% of residents in the province are now tenants, and that number is growing.

Wood would like to see landlords take some responsibility for making sure tenant information is correctly reflected on local voting rolls.

“In the private domain, owners have enough to do. They don’t have to,” he said. “It’s left to the people. That’s why I think you see a 50% turnout in municipal elections.

[email protected]

Advertisement 1

comments

Postmedia is committed to maintaining a lively yet civil discussion forum and encourages all readers to share their views on our articles. Comments can take up to an hour to be moderated before appearing on the site. We ask that you keep your comments relevant and respectful. We have enabled email notifications. You will now receive an email if you receive a reply to your comment, if there is an update to a comment thread you follow, or if a user follows you comments. Visit our Community Rules for more information and details on how to adjust your E-mail settings.

Deputy Commissioner visits 2022 7th Digital Census Training Program Center

0

Deputy Commissioner Inayatullah Waseem on Friday visited the Field Staff Training Center established for the Seventh Digital Census 2022 Training Program here at Government Higher Secondary School No 4

DIKHAN, (UrduPoint/Pakistan Point News – July 15, 2022): Deputy Commissioner Inayatullah Waseem on Friday visited the Field Staff Training Center established for the Seventh Digital Census 2022 Training Program here at Government Higher Secondary School n ° 4.

While urging the field staff to work honestly during the census, he said no citizen should be excluded from registering for the census as the country’s development and resources depend on it.

On this occasion, Chief Statistics Officer Dera Farrukh Jalis and Deputy Commissioner Daraban Umar Khattab also accompanied him.

Master Trainers and Coordinators from Pakistan Statistical Institute Suleman Khalid Dawlatzai (Tehsil Proa) have been engaged in the training of field staff.

On this occasion, the Deputy Commissioner reviewed the training process for field staff and asked them to carry out their duties with honesty and do their best to ensure that no building or person is excluded registration because the country’s economy, resources and development depend on the census.

The workshop focused on the tools, techniques, methodology and actions to be undertaken for the proper conduct of the census.

The workshop brought together all relevant departments.

The Deputy Commissioner emphasized the importance of the census and directed the participants to implement their skills acquired during the workshop to make the census a complete success.

He said that without the timely conduct of a transparent census, the distribution of resources among the different regions of the country could not be ensured.

Megan Woods doesn’t rule out cuts to housing funding for people with disabilities

0
Policy

Housing Minister Megan Woods won’t rule out cuts to improving state housing for people with disabilities. Photo/Mark Mitchell

The Greens want the government to rule out cutting a scheme that makes public residences accessible to people with disabilities in a bid to save money.

A leaked document from the Ministry of Housing and Urban Development warned that public housing agency Kāinga Ora’s borrowing was becoming unsustainable.

The document suggested suspending heating upgrade programs and scrapping “accessibility upgrades” from Kāinga Ora’s renovation program as a way to save money, as well as moving out of expensive remote locations. .

Green Party disability spokeswoman Jan Logie urged Housing Minister Megan Woods to rule out accepting the recommendation.

“It is absolutely essential that the government stop sacrificing disability rights for tax gain,” Logie said.

“We think the goal should be for all of our homes to be accessible. Twenty-five percent of the population has a disability. We could all have an accident where we can’t climb the steps, or need more space,” Logie said.

Currently, it is estimated that only 2% of homes are accessible. People living in public housing can apply for improvements to make their housing accessible. Kāinga Ora aims to have at least 15% of its new home constructions accessible to people with disabilities.

Logie said she’s heard of people with disabilities having to “shower at work or shower on their porch or wait an incredibly long time to find accessible public accommodation that’s right for them.”

Housing Minister Megan Woods has been asked if she would rule out changes to the disability renovation scheme.

She did not respond to that question, but a spokeswoman said no decision has yet been made and Woods has sought further guidance from officials.

National’s Housing spokesman Chris Bishop said the imbroglio showed why the government could make better use of community housing providers, non-governmental organizations that provide housing with government funding.

“That’s yet another argument for using the community housing sector, which has the will and the skills to build social housing,” Bishop said.

“What they need is a government that is not ideologically obsessed with Kāinga Ora being the provider of new social housing.”

The leaked document warned that the agency’s financial situation was deteriorating, largely due to skyrocketing construction costs, which are not being matched by increased revenue.

To illustrate the point, officials presented a cost comparison of Kāinga Ora’s construction program using its latest 2022 economic model with costs using its “previous benchmark” from the 2018 pre-inflation peak.

Using 2018 economic assumptions, the average interest cost per year for each additional public housing would be $14,457. The revised 2022 model used by Kāinga Ora has the average interest cost of a new location at $29,339.

Using the 2018 assumptions, Kāinga Ora’s interest costs would be $571 million in 2025/26 – instead, the most recent assumption projects these costs to be $842 million.

Kāinga Ora’s debt is now expected to peak in 2033 at $28.9 billion – the previous benchmark had a much lower debt peak at $20.9 billion.

Ministry officials warned that they were “concerned about Kanga Ora’s financial performance over the next four years and will consider options regarding Kāinga Ora’s funding”.

This review could involve the government making direct cash investments in Kāinga Ora.

CUNY group plans to get school’s Jewish population to ‘unlearn Zionism’

0

A small group of City University of New York (CUNY) students, faculty, and alumni plan to get the school’s Jewish population to “unlearn Zionism.”

The CUNY, which was the subject of a recent New York City Council hearing on anti-Semitism on college campuses, is no stranger to anti-Israel and anti-Jewish activity. Its law school approved a resolution to boycott Israel and all things related to it, also inviting Nerdeen Kiswani, who has a history of anti-Israel rhetoric and actions, as the keynote speaker in May.

Now, a group calling itself NIONCUNY – currently made up of 32 signatories, including seven students and four union delegates – has released a statement pledging to “create networks and programs within the CUNY Jewish population to challenge, criticize and unlearn Zionism so that they can form their own Jewish Identity”.

The statement challenges the links between Zionism and Judaism, accepted by the vast majority of Jews, and members of the CUNY population who support it.

“We vehemently oppose the Zionist movement within CUNY which aims to criminalize and demonize Palestinian students and workers. Additionally, we oppose liberal Zionist entities that falsely classify themselves as anti-Zionist while promoting Israeli settler colonial rule,” the statement read.

It also encourages endorsing boycotts against “the colonial and apartheid state of Israel without question and supporting all efforts to establish it within the CUNY.”

Jeffrey Lax, an Orthodox Jewish business professor at CUNY’s Kingsborough Community College and founder of SAFE (Students and Faculty for Equality) CUNY, told JNS that the NIONCUNY group is small, but represents something dangerous.

“I am convinced that the group is not representative of the overwhelming majority of Jews at CUNY or around the world, but, of course, I am concerned because it is the very strong, radical and militant vision that has caused problems for so many people,” he said.

Lax said it’s particularly troubling that four pledge signatories are delegates from CUNY’s Professional Staff Congress (PSC), the union that represents CUNY’s 30,000 faculty and staff.

“It’s not just emotional. It becomes a problem with the negotiation. The university admitted [at the City Council hearing] he knows there is a problem with anti-Semitism, so how can our bargaining unit be anti-Zionist? It’s a big professional problem, and it’s not true. Imagine saying you’re anti-black at a university with thousands of black students. It’s disgusting,” Lax said, adding that he had quit the union, although they still represent him legally in negotiating his terms of employment.

NIONCUNY also received the endorsement of the Communist Youth League of CUNY.

The signatories pledged to “encourage the hosting of anti-Zionist Jewish professionals to come and speak on CUNY campuses to show young Jewish adults that Zionism is not the only path and that since Zionism exists, the anti-Zionism is right. .” The group also calls for “wholehearted” endorsement of BDS and opposition to the widely accepted International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance (IHRA) working definition of anti-Semitism.

CUNY Law School’s BDS resolution is the subject of a complaint to the accrediting body of the American Bar Association and the New York City Commission on Human Rights and from the New York State Division of Human Rights for potential violations of the Discrimination Act.

California adds PFAS to list of chemicals subject to Prop 65 enforcement | MG+M The law firm

0

California just added per- and poly-fluoroalkyl substances (PFAS) to the list of chemicals requiring consumer warnings under Proposition 65, which means state residents can soon expect seeing the words “cancer” and “reproductive harm” on these common consumer products. like shampoo, nail polish, kitchen utensils and fast food.

PFAS are a group of synthetic chemicals that have been widely used for decades in consumer products such as fast food wrappers, clothing and carpets, and industrial products such as fire fighting foam. Although there are no epidemiological studies showing a statistically significant link between PFAS exposure and disease, in 2006 the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Scientific Advisory Board stated that the chemical is “suspected of being carcinogenic to humans”. State regulations on PFAS in water and consumer products soon followed, with California at the forefront. In addition to bill to ban the use of PFAS in cosmeticsCalifornia now requires any company selling products containing PFAS to provide a warning with the product, or face penalties of $2,500 per “violation.”

The impact of this latest regulation cannot be underestimated – PFAS are found in a wide variety of consumer products and California is the world’s fifth largest economy. California obviously holds considerable influence in setting standards for manufacturers, sellers and producers of goods around the world. As such, the practical impact of adding PFAS to the list of chemicals regulated by California law is that a significant percentage of any company engaged in domestic or interstate commerce will now be required to place warnings on common everyday products. Even virtual marketplace forums such as Amazon may be subject to Prop 65 enforcement actions. In order to manage Prop 65 risks and liabilities, businesses are advised to periodically review regulatory changes to ensure they remain compliant with Prop 65 requirements. In addition to having a system in place to track regulatory changes, it is also prudent for companies to adopt contractual provisions to reduce their liability in the event of 65 enforcement action. As more and more PFAS will be added to the list in the coming years, it is crucial that companies take the necessary steps now to minimize their risks and liabilities.

Convoy organizer to appear in court and release of census information: In the July 13 news

0

Since then, he has hired a new lawyer to fight for his release and defend him against the growing number of charges.

King was arrested Feb. 18 on charges related to his participation in the three-week protest against COVID-19 restrictions that took to the streets of Ottawa.

Also this…

Canadians will have a clearer picture this morning of what families look like in this country.

Statistics Canada will release the results of the 2021 National Census today which examines who lives together and how they relate to each other.

The data will examine family structure, including marital status, presence of children, blended families and multi-generational households.

For the first time, the Snapshot of Canadian Families will also include more detailed information on gender diversity within families.

And that …

The Bank of Canada will announce its key rate this morning as inflation remains well above its target.

Most economists expect the central bank to raise interest rates by three-quarters of a percentage point, bringing its key rate to 2.25%.

A rate hike of this magnitude would be the largest since 1998.

Following last month’s rate announcement, Governor Tiff Macklem said the central bank “may have to act faster” to bring inflation down.

The Bank of Canada will also release its quarterly monetary policy report with updated economic forecasts.

What we’re watching in the US…

In a heated and “unbalanced” dispute, Donald Trump battled objections from his White House lawyers to an ultimately rejected plan to seize state voting machines, the House Jan. 6 committee found.

Then, in a last-ditch effort to salvage his presidency, Trump summoned his supporters to march on the US Capitol for what turned into the now infamous deadly riot.

In another revelation Tuesday, committee co-chair Liz Cheney said the panel informed the Justice Department that Trump himself had contacted a potential witness who was speaking with the committee.

What we watch in the rest of the world…

The leaders of the Group of Seven industrial nations have tentatively agreed to back a cap on the price of Russian oil, the main pillar of the Kremlin’s financial revenue.

Participants in the price cap plan would agree to buy oil at a price below the market price.

The idea is to stop Vladimir Putin’s invasion of Ukraine while possibly reducing energy costs.

High energy costs are already weighing on economies and threatening to crack countries opposed to Russia’s invasion of Ukraine in February.

However, China and India, two countries that maintained business relations with Russia during the war, will have to follow suit.

On this day in 100 BC. AD …

Julius Caesar, the most famous general in Roman history, was born.

In entertainment…

A rock memorabilia dealer and two other men are accused of conspiring to sell allegedly ill-gotten handwritten lyrics to “Hotel California” and other Eagles hits.

The men pleaded not guilty on Tuesday to charges which, among the three, include conspiracy, criminal possession of stolen property and attempted criminal possession of stolen property.

Their lawyers insist the three are innocent, calling it a “civil dispute” over the property.

In sports…

It’s that time of the offseason when some NHL general managers are getting ready to spend. The free agency opens today at noon ET, with many intriguing situations and scenarios.

Nazem Kadri should get all the attention. He played for the Avalanche in their Cup win and looks set for a big payday. And then there’s Patrice Bergeron, who has yet to join the Boston Bruins, Ryan Strome and Andrew Copp from the New York Rangers, Vincent Trocheck from the Carolina Hurricanes and Paul Stastny from the Winnipeg Jets.

Elsewhere, unrestricted free agent Johnny Gaudreau has told the Calgary Flames he won’t be returning and will be testing the waters of free agency. Flames general manager Brad Treliving said he’ll make a few calls Wednesday morning and check what’s available, but he’s not going to spend recklessly to replace his star player.

Have you seen this?

The family of a five-year-old Saskatchewan boy whose body was found 81 days after he disappeared announced on Tuesday that he would be buried this week.

RCMP said Frank Young was in the Carrot River on Saturday, about two kilometers downstream from where he was last seen playing on Red Earth Cree Nation in April.

Frank’s grandmother, Teresa Whitecap, the family matriarch, said she participated in ceremonies and prayers to prepare for his burial on Friday.

This report by The Canadian Press was first published on July 13, 2022

The Canadian Press

David Weekley Homes construction projects of the month benefit 1,000 people

0

Team members in Dallas/Ft. Worth built 84 beds as part of the company’s Build Month project with Sleep in Heavenly Peace.

David Weekley Homes recently partnered with 18 local nonprofit organizations as part of the company’s CARE Build Month projects. Across the country, team members contributed over 3,800 volunteer hours to various projects that benefited over 1,000 people.

“At Sleep in Heavenly Peace, we believe it is important for a child to have a bed to sleep in and we know that the David Weekley Homes corporate culture believes in giving back to the community,” said Dwan Smith, president of the Nashville chapter of Sleep in Heavenly Peace. “We are very grateful for this partnership which helps to get children off the ground.”

Seventeen of the company’s 19 local divisions as well as the head office have all completed plans to build a total of 963 beds. This included partnerships with the following local chapters of Sleep in Heavenly Peace in these cities:

Charlotte

Nashville

denver

Portland

colorado springs

Charleston

Houston

dallas

San Antonio

Phoenix

Minneapolis/St. Paul

Jacksonville

Austin

Orlando

Raleigh

Indianapolis

A total of 950 team members participated in these projects across the country, many of whom also helped deliver the new beds to the children.

“I was proud to work alongside my team members to build 51 bunk beds for children in need. It’s a great feeling to give back to our community and to know that we have provided many local children with a place to rest at night,” Alyssa said. Ward, a sales consultant for David Weekley Homes in Orlando: “Sleep in Heavenly Peace is an amazing organization and I look forward to volunteering with them in the future.”

Local divisions in Atlanta and Salt Lake City have participated in construction projects with early childhood education centers. Projects included building a playhouse, painting, building storage shelves and minor repairs.

“Having a group of team members together to serve our community through HomeAid Atlanta and the Atlanta Children’s Shelter was not only rewarding for our team spirit, but also a reminder to take the time to s ‘stop and participate in improving our community,’ said Chris Nies, purchasing manager at David Weekley Homes in Atlanta.

In addition to team member volunteerism, the company has also received project support from business and supplier partners, real estate partners, and the community assisted with bedding and toiletries donations.

The project was an initiative of the company’s CARE program, which is a charitable and voluntary program that connects team members, owners, buyers and community partners with nonprofit organizations to have a positive impact. in the lives of everyone he touches and in all the communities he builds. through its lens, Building Dreams, Improving Lives. This is accomplished by the company’s team members who dedicate countless hours to different organizations in their communities. Additionally, more than $250 million has been donated over the past 20 years to worthy causes in the United States and abroad through company profits and the Dovetail Impact Foundation (formerly the David Weekley Family). Foundation).

About David Weekley Homes

David Weekley Homes, founded in 1976, is headquartered in Houston and operates in 19 cities across the United States. David Weekley Homes was the first builder in the United States to receive the Triple Crown of American Homebuilding, an honor that includes “America’s Top Builder”, “National Housing Quality Award” and “National Builder of year “. Weekley has also appeared on Fortune’s 100 Best Companies to Work For list 16 times. Since its inception, David Weekley Homes has closed over 110,000 homes. For more information about David Weekley Homes, visit the company’s website at http://www.davidweekleyhomes.com.

Share the article on social networks or by e-mail:

ID4D to support the population commission on civil status

0

The Nigeria Digital Identification for Development (ID4D) project says it has concluded plans to support the National Population Commission (NPC) in digitizing its civil registration process.

The ID4D project coordinator, Musa Odole Solomon revealed this during a courtesy visit to NPC Chairman, Alhaji Isa Kwarra, at the commission’s headquarters in Abuja.

Solomon, in a press release made available to Daily Trustdescribed the NPC as a key partner in the implementation of the ID4D project, providing commission support for the project.

He said, “ID4D is a Nigerian project jointly funded by the World Bank, the European Investment Bank and the French Development Agency.

“The development objective of the project is to increase the number of people with the National Identity Number (NIN) issued by a robust and inclusive core identity system that facilitates their access to services.

“The project is designed according to an ecosystem model and is not limited to a single organization. It therefore involves different government agencies, the private sector and civil society. The project has since identified the National Population Commission as an important ecosystem partner, hence this visit.

Solomon explained that “The ID4D project would fund technical assistance to create the enabling legal and regulatory environment for the development of a digital civil registry and strengthen its role in the country’s fundamental identification ecosystem, including the digitization of existing birth registration processes”.

In response, the NPC chairman said the commission is a willing partner in the country’s identity project, even though he has pledged to support and cooperate with the ID4D project.

Kwarra said he was pleased with the project’s willingness to support digitization of the civil registry, as well as capacity development, describing these as critical needs of the commission.

Speaking on the planned national census, he added that “we are planning to conduct the first digital census in Nigeria.”

How Laughing Gas Affects Blood Sugar

0

If you’re living with type 1 diabetes (T1D), you’re probably used to almost constant management of your blood sugar.

But trying to manage blood sugar levels during hospital stays, surgeries, outpatient procedures, and even a visit to the dentist can cause concern and require extra planning.

This article will outline the effects of getting the common anesthetic nitrous oxide – otherwise known as laughing gas – from the dentist, as well as what it can mean for you and your blood sugar.

Nitrous oxide is an effective and safe sedative agent. When mixed with oxygen, it can help people relax during medical procedures. It is especially useful for people who suffer from anxiety.

It is delivered through a small mask that fits tightly over your nose. It’s different from anesthesia, where you basically fall asleep for a procedure. Laughing gas simply gives you a feeling of calm and relaxation, with no residual effects once it wears off.

Although people may sometimes feel sleepy when taking nitrous oxide, they will still be able to respond to the dentist.

If you are anxious before a dental procedure, nitrous oxide may be a great option for you.

Dentists prefer to use it because:

  • The amount of sedation can quickly be increased or decreased.
  • It acts extremely quickly (takes effect after a few minutes).
  • It is extremely safe for the brain, heart, liver, lungs and kidneys.

It is useful for the very young, as well as for people with severe anxiety or disabilities, including diabetes.

The drug is simple and easy to administer through a face mask. Plus, there are no lasting side effects. However, nitrous oxide has short-term side effects and drawbacks.

Nitrous oxide is safe and effective for adults and children with type 1 and type 2 diabetes, according to research 2020.

Before recommending treatment with nitrous oxide, a person should discuss average blood sugar levels and A1C levels with their endocrinologist or diabetes care team. They should also discuss medications and treatment options to make sure nitrous oxide is appropriate.

It is especially important to know how to prevent hypoglycemia during any dental procedure requiring nitrous oxide.

The use of nitrous oxide generally requires fasting for several hours, usually about 6 hours before the visit to the dentist. This means that scheduling a morning appointment (with an overnight fast) may be easier for someone with diabetes. Blood sugar is often higher in the morning, which can be helpful in preventing hypoglycemia.

For children with diabetes, a dentist may not be able to treat a child if their blood sugar level is 250 mg/dL or higher at the time of a dental appointment, depending on the Louisiana State University School of Dentistry.

Although there is no scientific research focused on laughing gas and its effect on glucose levels, anecdotal evidence from the online diabetes community indicates that it does not raise or lower it. significantly during the procedure.

Some people say any fluctuation is more likely caused by anxiety and stress, both of which raise glucose levels in people with diabetes.

For people with diabetes, nitrous oxide can be somewhat tricky, as you may not experience hypoglycemia as effectively if you are lightly sedated:

  • Most importantly, make sure your dental team knows you have diabetes and what to do in case of severe hypoglycemia.
  • It is important to use a temporary basal (if you are using an insulin pump).
  • Wear a continuous blood glucose monitor (CGM) with low alerts enabled to ensure your dentist can hear if you drop during a procedure.
  • Always carry weak snacks (especially glucose gel which can be quickly absorbed by your gums without the need to chew!) when you go to the dentist.
  1. Most dentists will ask you to fast for at least 6 hours before receiving nitrous oxide, which can be difficult with diabetes if you frequently suffer from low blood sugar.
  2. Drinking clear liquids is generally acceptable about 2 hours before a treatment, so managing hypoglycemia with clear juice should suffice. That said, having an empty stomach when taking nitrous oxide can help prevent nausea and vomiting. This is something you should discuss with your dentist if you have any concerns about the strength of nitrous oxide and experience lower blood sugar, especially before a procedure.
  3. Try to avoid making dental appointments after strenuous exercise or during a meal that you usually rely on for carbohydrates. It can also increase the likelihood of hypoglycemia during a procedure. Work with your doctor to lower your insulin dose on the day of a procedure or use a temporary basal setting on your insulin pump to help prevent hypoglycemia. Always carry weak snacks and activate your hypoglycemic alerts if you wear a CGM, so that your dentist can intervene in the event of a hypoglycemic episode.

Good dental health is extremely important for people with diabetes. According to American Dental Associationthis condition means you are more prone to cavities, gum disease, and tooth decay.

It’s crucial to incorporate regular dental visits into your diabetes care, but sometimes dental procedures can get quite complicated and scary. This may require mild sedation to help you cope, such as nitrous oxide.

Although side effects are possible from laughing gas, these are not usually common.

Common short-term side effects include:

  • excessive sweating
  • chills
  • nausea
  • vomiting
  • dizziness
  • feel like sleeping

Some people also experience hallucinations or sound distortion after inhaling nitrous oxide.

People should be given more oxygen after stopping nitrous oxide to help prevent some of these side effects. You should only go home after the side effects have subsided.

If you are using nitrous oxide for long term use, take a vitamin B12 to prevent anemia.

With time and care taken to prepare properly before a dental visit, using nitrous oxide can be an effective way to manage dental anxiety without wreaking havoc on blood sugar.

“The census by caste of the denotified tribes is essential”

0

Members of the Joint Forum of Denotified Communities for Social Justice petitioned the collector here on Monday asking for a population census by caste in the center and the state government.

Their demands included urging the state to withdraw the order issued allowing a special reserve of 10.5% for employed Vanniyars, as part of the overall 20% quota for the most backward classes (MBC) and denotified communities (DNC).

“Acting in favor of one community is against the law. The High Court and the Supreme Court, when we brought cases against the reserves, have only reiterated the need for a population census by caste to support the reserves,” said MCA Anbalagan, executive member of the forum.

The current reservation would only deprive the employment and education opportunities of people belonging to MBC and DNC, he added.

They also urged the Union government to conduct a similar census and list them under Other Backward Classes to enable them to enjoy the benefits.

The benefits of undertaking the caste-based census would help determine the status of the backward classes and for governments to take steps to develop their current status, their petition said. “This will help recognize many unidentified communities where the government needs to intervene for their betterment,” Mr Anbagalan said.

They also asked the state to change the community certificate issued to DNC members as denotified tribes to reap the benefits granted by the Union government, something they have been asking for eight years.

Members of the 261 communities are due to gather on August 7 to stage a protest in Madurai in this regard.

Ezra Alleyne passes – NationNews Barbados – nationnews.com

0

posted on

Lawyer Ezra Alleyne (GP)

Barrister Ezra Alleyne died at Queen Elizabeth Hospital on Sunday.

Alleyne, 78, was the husband of Tassiea Bryan Alleyne and father of Daun, Gayle, Alistair and Nathan Alleyne.

He was a member of the Barbados Labor Party, successfully contesting the September 2, 1976 election to defeat Philip Greaves of the Democratic Labor Party by 2,797 votes to 2,563.

When the House of Assembly resumed, Alleyne, 32, was the youngest female MP at the time. He served as Vice Chairman of the Tom Adams Administration from 1976 to 1981.

During the election campaign, a writer wrote in The Nation: “Armed with all the basic information about the constituency, he planned a campaign and created a canvassing schedule that allowed him to penetrate the crucial districts of the constituency.

Its program of meetings has also been prepared to emphasize according to the geographical distribution of voters. Alleyne timed his campaign to ensure he peaked at the right time, just before Election Day.

His circular, considered the most original of the entire campaign, was in the hands of the electorate at a time when it would be neither too late to fully assimilate its contents nor too early to be forgotten on election day.

Six months after the election, he was asked what he learned in another interview.

“The impact of the real conditions in which people live and the high level of unemployment are two things that are always in front of me. In fact, it scares me. It is only now that people come to see me regularly as an MP that I realize the extent of the unemployment problem in Barbados. What strikes me is that the solution to this problem cannot come overnight,” he said.

Alleyne attended St Stephen’s Junior School and Combermere School before migrating to England, where he pursued law studies at Queen Mary College and the University of London. He was called to the bar at Middle Temple in 1970.

He returned to Barbados the same year.

He was a lecturer at the Cave Hill Campus of the University of the West Indies for several decades, with a focus on constitutional law. Later, he diversified into corporate and commercial law, in particular international and offshore business law and trusts.

Ezra Alleyne passes
Ronald Biggs and two of his lawyers – Ezra Alleyne (left) and Alair Shepherd during his extradition trial in Barbados. (CASE)

Older Barbadians will remember Alleyne as the barrister who successfully defended British train robber Ronnie Biggs at an extradition hearing here in 1981. Biggs, who robbed a mail train in 1963, was kidnapped in Brazil and brought to Barbados. He knew Alleyne when the latter was a young clerk in England, having nicknamed him Sunshine when he first saw him in court.

Alleyne served as legal representative for the Public Utilities Board for ten years and acted as counsel for the court-appointed liquidators of the bankrupt insurance company BCCI.

He was also a lawyer for the Nation Publishing Co. Ltd, a longtime columnist and political analyst, and a former president of the Caribbean Broadcasting Corporation and the National Housing Corporation. (SAT)

12 million child marriages rival J&K population, data shows

0


Nearly 12 million Indian children were married before the age of 10, of whom 84% were Hindus and 11% Muslims, an analysis of recently released census data reveals. To put it in context, this number is equivalent to the population of Jammu and Kashmir.

Given that many of the 7.84 million (65%) child brides were girls, which reinforces the fact that girls are significantly more disadvantaged; eight out of 10 illiterate children who were married were also girls.

The data further reveals that 72% of all Hindu girls married before age 10 lived in rural areas compared to 58.5% of Muslim girls, with higher levels of education correlating with later marriage.

Jain women marry late (at a median age of 20.8 years), followed by Christian women (20.6 years) and Sikh women (19.9 years). Hindu and Muslim women have the lowest median age at first marriage (16.7 years), according to a report by Nirantar: A Center for Gender and Education – a Delhi-based advocacy group. Women in urban areas marry on average more than two years later than their rural counterparts.

The report also notes that the level of teenage pregnancy and childbearing is 9 times higher among women with no education than among women with 12 or more years of education.

As many as 5.4 million (44%) of married children under the age of 10 were illiterate – 80% of them female – indicating the extent to which lower levels of education are correlated with early marriage.

Up to 1,403 women have never attended an educational institution for every 1,000 men who have not.

In developing countries, girls with less access to quality education are more likely to marry early, wrote Quentin Wodon, an adviser in the World Bank’s education department.

Better and safer employment opportunities for girls can also reduce child marriage, as can better access to basic infrastructure (water, electricity), which frees up time spent on domestic chores for schooling, wrote Wodon.

Dear reader,

Business Standard has always endeavored to provide up-to-date information and commentary on developments that matter to you and that have wider political and economic implications for the country and the world. Your constant encouragement and feedback on how to improve our offering has only strengthened our resolve and commitment to these ideals. Even in these challenging times stemming from Covid-19, we remain committed to keeping you informed and updated with credible news, authoritative opinions and incisive commentary on relevant topical issues.
However, we have a request.

As we battle the economic impact of the pandemic, we need your support even more so that we can continue to bring you more great content. Our subscription model has received an encouraging response from many of you who have subscribed to our online content. More subscription to our online content can only help us achieve the goals of bringing you even better and more relevant content. We believe in free, fair and credible journalism. Your support through more subscriptions can help us practice the journalism we are committed to.

Support quality journalism and subscribe to Business Standard.

digital editor

The best high schools during covid expected the most from their students

0

It’s hard to overstate how bad the past two years have been for American schools. Student performance plummeted, and that only counts the kids who showed up. Online classes were uncomfortable and frustrating. Parental outrage at our education system has grown.

But in some high schools, learning continues at a high level. It will take more research to understand all of this. I only identified a few. These may just be bizarre exceptions. But they suggest that schools committed to deep learning for all students can fend off even such horrific events.

Since 1998, I have been collecting data from secondary schools where students are unusually participating in college-level courses and examinations in the Advanced Placement, International Baccalaureate and Cambridge programs. I call it the Challenge Index. The pandemic prevented me from getting reliable numbers in 2020, but I have enough data from the years just before and after to show which schools had the highest turnout rates for demanding three to five AP or IB exams hours that are essential to maintaining high standards.

Of the top 10 schools nationwide for which I have before and after data, eight showed an increase in college-level test turnout from spring 2019 before the pandemic to spring 2021, when the adverse effects on schools diminished but remained disruptive.

These eight high schools include the McAllen, Pharr, San Juan, Frontier, and Alamo campuses of the Texas-based IDEA public charter network. There is also the Mesa, Arizona campus of the publicly chartered BASIS network. These six schools admit students based on random lotteries, but had three or four times as many seniors passing at least one AP exam than the national average.

The two remaining schools in the top eight whose Challenge Index scores have increased during the pandemic are magnets that admit students on the basis of their academic talents. These are Carnegie Vanguard in Houston and Young Women’s Preparatory Academy in Miami.

Magnets get the top performing students. BASIS charters are primarily inspired by middle-class families. But IDEA schools improved their already impressive results despite having mostly poor students. These schools hire ambitious teachers, closely support their work, and focus intensely on preparing students for the AP and IB exams, which are written and scored by independent experts.

There are many schools on my list, including mainstream neighborhood schools, that have shown similar resilience during the pandemic, but their number pales in comparison to the multitude of American campuses devastated by what has happened. has passed. I am not saying that high standards are a cure for the damage of pandemics. My only point is that if you are looking for schools that are successful even in the worst conditions, they tend to demand a lot from students and help them achieve those goals.

I rate schools based on a simple ratio – the number of AP, IB or Cambridge exams given in the year divided by the number of seniors graduating. Large schools therefore have no advantage over small schools. The most common school evaluation systems emphasize average test scores. I don’t do that, because I think the scores are more a measure of parent affluence than school quality. To some extent, the list not only reveals what the students know, but also shows how challenging education they have experienced. The two factors are related, but I think the latter is a better measure of school quality. Having lots of books at home is good, but not all children have this advantage.

What sets schools apart in the Challenge Index is not family income but teacher expectations. Schools that do well on the list open AP, IB, and Cambridge courses to anyone who wants to take them, and sometimes require everyone to take these courses and tests. Unfortunately, most high schools only allow students with good grades into these programs. They don’t understand that even students who fail exams learn more than they would in regular classes.

When I started the list 24 years ago, only 1% of American high schools had at least half of their juniors and seniors attending AP, IB, or Cambridge programs. Energetic educators have since increased that number to around 12%, a slow but significant gain. You can find my data at jaymathewschallengeindex.com. Rankings from 2019 are on the 2020 list and rankings from 2021 are on the 2022 list.

Will Robertson, an English teacher at Corbett High School near Portland, Oregon, vigorously opposed his school’s 2005 decision to require students to take multiple AP courses and exams. Corbett was an average rural school. Robertson predicted disaster. He told his innovative headmaster that his students couldn’t handle such demands.

In another memo to the principal three years later, Robertson confessed that his assumptions “were completely wrong.” He said “after a week of initial grumbling, students began to accept AP for everyone as the norm. My response to all concerns was simply, “That’s what we’re doing here now. I had forgotten how flexible teenagers can be. They quickly agreed and moved on. Corbett was in the top third of 1% of schools on the 2022 list.

If a school insists that all students do hard work, that changes the mood, especially during crises like the pandemic. The sudden shift to Zoom classes and online learning made learning more difficult, but the goals were so deeply embedded in school cultures that almost everyone worked to maintain them.

In most schools, the pandemic has led to a decline in teaching and learning, especially among the most disadvantaged children. The fact that some schools with strong cultures have succeeded anyway is in many ways innocuous. Our schools need to focus not on what might have been, but on getting our children back to the level where they can be ready for college or work.

But it doesn’t hurt to keep in mind that challenging all students and giving them the necessary encouragement and support can make a difference. Students, teachers and parents united by an ambitious program can overcome even a health disaster. The more schools like this we have, the better.

Dog census expected to begin later this month – The Oakland Press

0

Beginning July 25, the Oakland County Animal Shelter Census Team will be going door to door in Farmington Hills to verify compliance with state law that requires all dogs to have a license. valid dog.

The Michigan State Dog Law of 1919 was enacted to ensure that all dogs are vaccinated against rabies up to date. Census officers will drive Oakland County marked vehicles and wear Oakland County shirts with proper identification.

If residents are not currently in compliance, dog licenses can be purchased at the Farmington Hills Treasury Division, located inside City Hall at 31555 W. Eleven Mile Road, with proof of vaccination against rabies. Proof of sterilization is also required for the sterilized/sterilized discount.

A license must be purchased within 30 days of purchasing or acquiring a new dog; a puppy that has reached the age of four months; or move to Farmington Hills.

For more information on fees, go to http://www.fhgov.com/departments-

services/finance/treasury/canine licensing.

You can also purchase your dog license with a credit card through the Oakland County Animal Control website at www.oakgov.com/petadoption.

For questions, contact the Oakland County Animal Shelter at 248-975-4463.

Tax administration should focus on gangs rather than success

0

“The ACT party today announced that it will use the new powers of the Inland Revenue to investigate income and taxes paid by gang members,” ACT leader David Seymour said.

“The Labor Government has given the Inland Revenue Commissioner the power to request any financial information, whether private or personal. He came up with a list of what he considers “rich assholes” mostly collected from the NBR rich list so he could try to introduce an inheritance tax.

“ACT would take those powers and say to Inland Revenue – stop with the big poppy syndrome, stop targeting the most successful New Zealanders who are already paying huge amounts of tax on their legal income.

“Instead, we can identify a case of high rollers not paying their fair share of taxes. Gangs survive through their ability to evade law and authority. Information gathered by the Inland Revenue cannot be used to lock up gang members directly, but they can be used to improve future gang taxation policies.

“The tax law applies to everyone, even gang members. According to Inland Revenue, illegal income is still income for tax purposes. But by its very nature, it is difficult for the government to tax illegal income.

“It does law-abiding taxpayers a double injustice: Not only do gangs avoid taxes, but taxpayers have to foot the bill or suffer the consequences of the crime personally.

“Gangs are out of control in New Zealand. You only have to read the news headlines or simply walk down the street to see it. There was a 50% increase in gang membership under Labor.

“The work sent a message to the gangs that they are untouchable. ACT says it’s time we stop hammering hard-working, law-abiding New Zealanders and start focusing on the people who harm our society.

“ACT is sending a clear message that it expects existing laws to be enforced, and it will empower police and government agencies to enforce them, focusing on criminals rather than high-performing Kiwis.”

© Scoop Media

King Cobra Population at Pilikula Biological Park Breeding Center Increases by 38

0

It was a fascinating day at the Pilikula Biological Park King Cobra Captive Breeding Center, where as many as 38 king cobra eggs hatched on Friday.

“The eggs started hatching on July 7 – the 76th day after laying – and continued until Friday,” said H Jayaprakash Bhandary, director of the biological park, officially known as Dr. Shivarama Biological Park. Karanth.

Each king cobra hatchling is about one and a half meters long.

Nagamani – the eight-year-old female king cobra who was rescued and transferred to the park from Sampaje after suffering serious injuries – had laid the eggs after mating with Nagendra, the king cobra born at the captive breeding center of the park in 2010-2011.

The Central Zoo Authority (CZA) had recognized Pilikula as a captive breeding facility in November 2007, and shortly thereafter funds were approved for the construction of a spacious king cobra breeding facility.

“The captive breeding project has been resumed in accordance with the CZA directive. A natural forest has been created within the compound, which simulates conditions similar to the Western Ghats,” Bhandary said.

So far, more than 100 king cobras have been bred at the center. In 2010, three king cobras laid about 100 eggs at the center. While some of the king cobras bred at the center were sent to various zoos around the country as part of the animal exchange program, some were released back into the forest. Currently, five of the 14 king cobras in the center are female, each of them being microchipped to identify them as king cobras.

A team of officials, including senior science officer Jerald Vikram Lobo, veterinarian Dr Madhusdhan K, biologist Suma MS and caretaker Dinesh Kumar KP, would monitor snake breeding at the center.

Pilikula Biological Park closed to visitors

Due to flooding and uprooted trees, Pilikula Biological Park will be closed to the public until Monday. A tree is said to have fallen outside the park’s ostrich enclosure. Deer, sambar deer and barking deer were moved from their usual enclosures due to flooding. Reportedly, some trees inside the park premises are so bent that they could be uprooted and fall at any time.

“Due to the waterlogging of the trail, it has been decided to close the park with the safety of visitors and animals in mind. It is hoped that the water level will drop inside the park with the decrease in rainfall,” said the director of the biological park, H Jayaprakash Bhandary.

SAGIP party list calls for reduction in power system loss charges

0

By Billy Begas

SAGIP party list representatives Rodante Marcoleta and Caroline Tanchay have jointly filed a bill to reduce system loss fees imposed on unfortunate electricity customers.

In the System Loss Limitation Bill (House Bill 160), lawmakers decided to reduce the recoverable rate of system losses to just 1%.

The current law, The Theft of Electricity and Transmission Materials/Lines Act 1994 (RA 7832), allows system losses to be recovered from consumers, capped at 14% for cooperatives. electricity and 9.5% for private electricity utilities.

System loss is electricity that dissipates during the distribution process due to natural causes or theft.

Normal system loss occurs when electricity travels a long distance from power plants to end users. The longer the distance, the higher the system loss will be.

“However, this normal loss is a fact recognized by electric utilities when they decided to venture into this area. Like any other business venture, normal losses are considered legitimate business risks,” the authors said in the explanatory note to the bill.

The lawmakers pointed out that “shifting too much of the burden of these system losses onto consumers is not only unfair, but also deters utilities from prioritizing quality and reliable service, knowing they can easily pass on charges on consumers”.

“Limiting the phasing out of system losses to a smaller cap will not significantly impoverish electric utilities, but will save the lives of the consuming public, especially poor and marginalized families who can barely meet their needs. dailies,” the lawmakers said. added.

Public Art Equity Census Catalog 3,000 Pieces, Identification Disparities – WISH-TV | Indianapolis News | Indiana Weather forecast

0

INDIANAPOLIS (WISH) — The Indiana Arts Council’s efforts to catalog public arts helped form the data for its new Equity in Public Art Census.

Now that public art disparities have been identified, organizers say this will help guide us on how to make improvements.

Over the past year, Scouts have been able to identify over 3,000 pieces of public art visible on public rights-of-way, but have also identified several public art deserts. Art Equity Census officials say owning these works of art is essential to telling the stories of the community and promoting its value.

Public art often reflects the community. It often means that a community suffers and triumphs.

“If I have art in my neighborhood, if I have art in my community, that tells me again that my community is valuable. My community is a beautiful place to live,” said researcher Danicia Monet Malone.

A year ago, the arts council and Rokh, in partnership with multiple agencies, launched an Art Equity Census to identify the art in Marion County, who creates it, and why it is there. Key findings highlighted disparities and areas for improvement.

“One thing we are proud to have identified are public art deserts. These are communities where public art is scarce or public art is not as accessible,” said Monet Malone. “If we think public art is a resource and a necessity in our communities, then we should be looking at how we can support those communities.”

Just under 20% of artworks lacked an artist signature or marker, creating challenges for research aimed at accurately measuring equity, inclusion and representation. Among the artists identified, black, Latino and Asian artists represent only a quarter of the work even though they represent half of the population.

“Anyone’s experience of public space should not be predicted by their race, gender, or economic status,” said public art director Julia Moore. “We don’t want to see public art that doesn’t speak to people in the community.

Arts Council officials say the data collected will help improve public art inventories, better attribute artists’ works, and inform civic partnerships to help direct funding. This will allow more artists to identify and share community stories through their work.

“We want to make sure that the public art artists who create public art reflect the people who live in the community. We want to make sure the stories of neighborhood residents are told by artists who are very deeply invested in those stories,” Moore said.

A large percentage of public art had no name listed, so in the fall the Arts Council will launch a campaign to encourage artists to claim their work.

Campaign for more social housing for people with disabilities in Kilkenny

0

The Irish Wheelchair Association has launched Think Ahead, Think Housing 2022, its annual campaign for more social housing for people with disabilities in Kilkenny.

Think Ahead, Think Housing is an awareness campaign for disabled people in the county, encouraging them to think ahead and apply for housing from Kilkenny County Council if they will need it in the years to come.

According to Tony Cunningham, national housing director at the Irish Wheelchair Association,

“Think Ahead, Think Housing is for anyone with a disability in Kilkenny who wants to leave their home and start their independent life or anyone who is worried about where they will end up living as they get older. Our campaign encourages and supports people to apply for accommodation with their local authority as soon as possible. »

“Among our members we find that there is no livable wheelchair accommodation available through private hire or local authorities,” Tony said.

“We at the Irish Wheelchair Association campaign for change, but it is up to people with disabilities to apply to their local authority for social housing so they can be included in new local authority housing development plans, which will take several years to be completed.”

“We know that in Kilkenny and across Ireland there is not just a shortage of accessible accommodation, there is a complete lack of wheelchair-habitable accommodation options. As a result, across Ireland, 1,300 young and middle-aged people with physical disabilities have been forced to live in aged care homes due to a lack of accessible social housing. This cannot be the future and there is a lot of work to be done locally and nationally for our housing campaign.

In 2021, the Irish Wheelchair Association was part of a successful campaign to include ‘wheelchair livable accommodation’ as an option on social housing application forms.

According to Jean Coleman, national housing program manager for the Irish Wheelchair Association, now is a good time to apply for social housing: “The government’s national housing strategy aims to increase the supply of social housing to an average by 33,000 per year over the next decade thanks to public funding of 4 billion per year.In addition, for the first time, applicants can record their need for livable wheelchair-accessible accommodation on their application form. 2021, it was not possible for a person with a disability to specifically include their accessibility requirements on their application for social housing Thus, we call on people with disabilities who wish to have their own accommodation to contact their local authority for the new form of demand for social housing,” said Jean Coleman.

“It was the first step in our housing campaign,” says Tony Cunningham. “Now people can register their needs on their housing applications and local authorities and disabled people’s organizations can track the specific needs of people on our social housing waiting lists. At the Irish Wheelchair Association we have even bigger plans to change outdated building regulations that are inaccessible in Ireland.But we need people with disabilities who want to live independently to reach out to Kilkenny County Council, be included and be seen.We cannot change things together,” Tony Cunningham said. “People with physical disabilities must be included in Ireland’s social housing strategy as never before,” he said.

For more details visit www.iwa.ie/thinkhousing.ie

ADVERTISEMENT – KEEP READING BELOW

Kemmer Gazette | The state’s elderly population is growing

0

CHEYENNE — The state’s elderly population (65 and older) increased 3.6% between July 2020 and July 2021, according to US Census Bureau estimates. In comparison, Wyoming’s total population grew by only 0.3% over the same period. The median age (half of the population is younger and the other half is older) increased by 0.3 to 38.9 years, while it rose from 38.5 to 38.8 from 2020 to 2021 for the United States.

The figure indicates that the aging of the population of the United States and Wyoming has been rapid. “Although the impact of aging baby boomers (born between 1946 and 1964) was the main reason, emigration of young people and declining fertility rate also played a role,” said Dr Wenlin Liu. , Chief State Economist of Wyoming, Economic Analysis. Division. “Since the first baby boomers turned 65 in 2011, there has been a rapid increase in the size of the elderly population.”

Even with rapid aging, Wyoming’s median age still ranked in the middle compared to other states in 2021.

Wyoming has one of the highest proportions of the baby boomer population (57-75 years old in 2021) and one of the lowest proportions of Generation X (41-56 years old in 2021) in the country. For example, the number of residents aged 45-54 was approximately 13,000 (or 16.8%) fewer than the 60-69 age group. “Wyoming does not have enough resident workers to replace baby boomers retiring under normal economic conditions,” Liu said. “Wyoming’s demographic transition and labor market environment provide excellent opportunities and encouragement for unemployed residents seeking employment in the state as many baby boomers exit the workforce.”

Wyoming’s population ages 65 and older grew from 70,090 in 2010 to 103,877 in 2021, or 48.2%, higher than the US growth rate of 38.7% over the same period. The share of the state’s elderly population (65 and older) was 17.9% in 2021, higher than the US level of 16.8%.

Wyoming’s senior population is expected to reach 135,000, well over one-fifth of the state’s total residents by 2030, when all baby boomers will be in that age group.

Since 2020, the population under 18 has decreased by 1.0% while preschool children (under 5 years old) have decreased by 3.3%. The 18-64 age group fell slightly, -0.2% over the year. Wyoming’s total minority population reached 96,483 in July 2021. Minority is defined as any group other than single-race non-Hispanic whites.

Minority growth was 1,179, or 1.2%, compared to a 0.3% increase for the state’s total population. In fact, it is the addition of the minority population that has contributed to all of the state’s population growth since 2010. Hispanics were the largest minority group at 61,087 in July 2021, an annual increase of 1, 5%.

The black or African American population remained the same as July 2020, at 6,016. Other minority races, such as American Indian and Asian, declined slightly, while races with two or more recorded growth of 3.1%. The majority, non-Hispanic whites, rose just 0.1%. At 16.7% of the state’s total population, the proportion of minorities in Wyoming was still ranked 8th lowest in the nation, while 40.7% of US residents are minorities. “The nation and people of Wyoming continue to grow in racial and ethnic diversity,” Dr. Liu said.

The U.S. Census Bureau also released estimates of the county’s 2021 population by age, gender, race, and Hispanic origin. Here are some highlights:

Hot Springs County’s black or African American population in 2021 was 31.0% higher than a year ago. Big Horn, Platte and Washakie counties also experienced growth rates of over 7.0% each during the year.

The Hispanic population grew fastest in Crook County at 10.4% between 2020 and 2021, followed by Weston and Sheridan counties at 9.9 and 8.7%, respectively.

Fremont County had the highest minority population percentage in 2021 at 30.9%, dominated by the Native American population, followed by Carbon (23.9%), Laramie (22.2%) and Sweetwater (20. .9%) where most of the minority population was Hispanic.

The largest county, Laramie, also had the largest minority population in 2021, including 15,638 Hispanics, 2,168 African Americans, 1,215 Asians, and 2,600 from two or more races. They make up 25.6%, 36.0%, 21.0%, and 23.5% of the state’s total Hispanic, Black, Asian, and two or more races population, respectively.

The counties with the smallest proportion of minority population in 2021 were Crook (6.2%), followed by Lincoln (8.3%).

The oldest county in the state was Hot Springs, with a median age of 48.7, and 28.1% of its population was 65 or older in 2021. Other counties with a higher proportion of elderly population (65 and older) were Johnson (26.6%), Platte (26.5%) and Park (24.9%). These counties tend to have the smallest proportion of children, and their median ages were all over 45.0.

The youngest county was Albany, with a median age of 28.9 in 2021, followed by Campbell (36.0), Sweetwater (37.1), and Uinta (37.5). The median age in the state’s two largest counties, Laramie and Natrona, was 37.9 and 38.1 each.

Crook and Campbell counties had the highest percentage of preschool (under 5) population (6.9% and 6.6% each) in 2021, followed by Fremont (6.2%) and Uinta ( 6.1%). The proportion was 5.6% statewide in 2021.

Campbell County had the lowest percentage of the population aged 65 or older, at 12.2%, followed by Albany (13.0%) and Sweetwater (14.1%) counties.

COVID and bust: China’s private healthcare system hit by strict coronavirus checks

0

SHANGHAI, July 6 (Reuters) – A court in central China’s Fuyang city on March 24 ruled that a $1.5 billion hospital built four years earlier had filed for bankruptcy because that he was unable to pay his debts.

For most of the past two years, Fuyang Minsheng Hospital has been fully involved in mass coronavirus vaccination and screening programs in the city, training nearly 100 staff to perform throat swabs and implementing set up mobile vaccination facilities to reach schools and workplaces, at the behest of city officials.

The diversion of resources to what China calls its “zero-COVID” approach to containing and eliminating the virus has forced the hospital to suspend many services it relied on for revenue, sealing its financial failure.

Join now for FREE unlimited access to Reuters.com

Register

A civil court decision in Fuyang dealing with Minsheng’s restructuring claim said the hospital’s ‘funding difficulties’ were due to ‘the impact of the epidemic’ as well as its inability to obtain a bank loan .

According to Kanyijie, a news service specializing in China’s medical industry, the 1,000-bed, 16-hectare Minsheng Hospital saw a decline soon after the first wave of infections spread across China.

“Since January 2020, in order to cooperate with the city’s epidemic prevention and control work, the hospital has suspended some diagnosis and treatment activities, and revenue has dropped significantly,” Kanyijie said in April. “There was virtually no medical income and the economic pressures were enormous.”

Even after it went bankrupt, as hospital administrators worked on a restructuring plan, local government officials publicly ordered the hospital’s medical staff to put on protective gear and head to what they called the “front line” of the war on coronavirus, where doctors and nurses rushed to perform 400,000 nucleic acid tests on local citizens in five days.

“We will go wherever we are needed,” hospital director Li Wenfang told the hospital’s website. “The epidemic is not receding and we will not be receding.”

Minsheng is just one of dozens of private hospitals that have filed for bankruptcy in China over the past two years, driven over the edge by the cost of complying with the country’s zero COVID policies. Minsheng and some other hospitals have continued to operate to some extent through bankruptcy, but many have closed, evidence of the unintended consequences of the inflexible policy on the country’s efforts to modernize the patchwork healthcare system that cares for its 1, 4 billion citizens.

The world’s second-largest economy remains behind the rest of the developed world by many health metrics and is in the midst of a ‘Healthy China’ program that aims to cut average life expectancy from 76 to 79 years by 2030, while increasing cancer survival rates. and other chronic diseases. Zero-COVID may actually make these goals more difficult to achieve.

“Healthcare facilities at all levels and in all provinces have been affected,” said Hong Xiao, a researcher at the Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center in Seattle, who studies the long-term impact of the pandemic on Chinese hospitals. “Human and financial resources have been diverted from routine outpatient and inpatient care for non-COVID-19 illnesses to support mass testing and/or deal with rising COVID-19 cases.”

The Chinese health administration did not respond to a request for comment on this story. The country’s leaders have strongly defended the zero-COVID approach as the country’s lowest-cost option, necessary to prevent hospitals from being overwhelmed and to protect an aging population that has low immunity to the virus.

Chinese President Xi Jinping, speaking during a visit to Wuhan last week, acknowledged the economic costs of zero-COVID, but said “it is better to temporarily affect economic development than to harm lives. and people’s health”. He said the consequences would be “unimaginable” if China accepted the coronavirus as endemic, like every other major country in the world.

BANKRUPTCY MORE THAN DOUBLE

Private hospitals are an important part of China’s healthcare system, accounting for around 15% of total patient visits in 2020, according to the latest government data, with public hospitals taking the rest. The country had 35,394 hospitals, both public and private, at the end of 2020.

Forty-six major private hospitals declared bankruptcy in 2021, compared to 26 in 2020 and 21 in 2019, according to the Tianyancha business information database. Twenty-six private hospitals entered formal bankruptcy proceedings in the first five months of this year alone, including Minsheng.

As many as 685 hospitals – public and private – closed in 2020 alone, nearly double the previous year, according to a study based on Tianyancha data released by state media late last year. .

Admittedly, hospitals and health services around the world have been disrupted and weakened by the coronavirus, and some of those that have closed in China have been affected by other factors, such as the government capping drug prices, a source lucrative income. for many hospitals.

But data shows attendance has fallen sharply at private hospitals, in part because of policies requiring them to send patients with COVID-like symptoms to public facilities. Due to widespread lockdowns and fear of being forcibly quarantined or hospitalized, many people have been unable or unwilling to travel to hospitals to receive treatment for other illnesses, depriving revenue hospitals.

The total number of visits to all health facilities, public and private, stood at 7.74 billion in 2020, down nearly a billion from the previous year, according to the latest official data. the first annual decline since 2003.

The medical journal Lancet Regional Health published a study in 2021 that showed the coronavirus outbreak in China in early 2020 had a “devastating collateral effect” on patient numbers across all regions and wards, the figures still not fully recovered as of June 2020, even though the outbreak was largely under control by March.

He estimated that visits to health facilities fell by about 24% from January to June of that year, with the largest reductions in developed parts of the country, largely due to the virus preventing patients from traveling to hospitals or hospitals unable to treat them, due to the coronavirus disrupting operations.

“These reductions and stagnations in prevention and treatment are likely to have significant collateral health effects in the population that far outweigh the direct health effects of infection,” the Lancet study said. “Cripping revenue losses…threaten the viability of a significant number of health care facilities and providers.”

DEATH IN SHANGHAI

The diversion of medical resources to enforce zero COVID policies has resulted in deaths, critics say. On March 23, during Shanghai’s recent two-month lockdown, a woman named Zhou Shengni died of an asthma attack after being denied treatment at Shanghai’s East Hospital, which had closed. his emergency department due to “epidemic prevention and control measures,” according to an official notice from the hospital.

China has sought to censor unflattering reports of what happened during Shanghai’s lockdown. Citizens, however, compiled a list using the Airtable data collaboration website, collecting the records of 210 loved ones who the people say died because they were unable to access treatment or their treatment was delayed. Some have uploaded medical documents as evidence. Reuters was unable to independently verify the cases.

Shanghai Health Commission’s Wu Jinglei said at a March 25 briefing that people were struggling to get medical treatment for non-COVID-related illnesses.

“There has been a huge backlog of requests in a short time for emergency services,” Zhao Dandan, deputy director of the Shanghai Municipal Health Commission, said during a briefing in late April. He said “there is still a big gap with the actual needs of the public”, meaning hospitals are still unable to provide the city’s residents with the services they need.

The Chinese government spent at least 150 billion yuan ($22 billion) on coronavirus testing in the first five months of this year, and the total annual cost of building a permanent testing system could reach 410 billion yuan, according to Huachuang Securities, a Beijing-based firm. brokerage.

A 2020 Chinese Ministry of Finance decision said all COVID-related medical expenses should be covered by state insurance funds or central government subsidies. The problem for many private hospitals, which provide some of the labor and equipment for such tests, is that they are not necessarily reimbursed immediately by the government for such work, which leaves them makes them financially vulnerable.

A doctor at a public hospital in Shanghai told Reuters that 300 staff members had been engaged in COVID testing since the city’s lockdown began in early April, and continued even after restrictions were lifted in early June, and were always expected by hospital managers to volunteer on weekends to test residents.

A study of the Shanghai outbreak published last month by the Chinese Center for Disease Control and Prevention said the fight against the more infectious but less deadly variant of Omicron had “imposed an enormous burden” on Chinese medical resources. , overwhelming hospitals not with very sick patients, but with asymptomatic patients. and mildly symptomatic cases.

“Regions that previously admitted all people infected with SARS-CoV-2 may not have sufficient hospital resources to admit non-severe Omicron patients,” said the study, authored by a team of local medical experts, including Zhang Wenhong, who expressed skepticism. on zero COVID policies before. The document was later removed from the CDC’s website.

“All of these resources have been devoted to implementing the zero COVID strategy, and less attention and fewer resources have been devoted to building public health capacity,” said Yanzhong Huang, public health expert at the Council. on Foreign Relations, an American think tank.

Join now for FREE unlimited access to Reuters.com

Register

Reporting by David Stanway in Shanghai Editing by Tony Munroe and Bill Rigby

Our standards: The Thomson Reuters Trust Principles.

Will US Census Overcount in Delaware Affect Federal Funding?

0
to play

Delaware doesn’t have as many people as we thought, and that might affect the amount of federal money the state gets, but it won’t change the electoral redistricting.

According to the 2020 U.S. Census, the population of the first state was 989,948 compared to 897,934 in 2010.

But the Census Bureau announced in May that Delaware was one of eight “overcounted” states in 2020, while six states were “undercounted,” according to the post-census survey.

“Releasing these…estimates helps us understand how well we’ve done this decade, state by state, in our efforts to count everyone living in the United States,” the Census Bureau director said. Robert L. Santos. “Transparency is an essential aspect of scientific integrity. This is why we communicate these results to the public.

The survey included interviews with 114,000 Delaware households, examining how each household’s response compared to the actual count from the 2020 census.

Santos said 36 states and the District of Columbia had no statistically significant undercount or overcount because the difference between survey interviews and actual census responses was less than 1%.

However, 14 states, including Delaware, have done so.

For Delaware, the overcount means that the actual number of people on April 1, 2020 is estimated at 935,996 instead of 989,948, or about 53,952 fewer people.

Santos said the follow-up surveys cannot be used to alter the 2020 census tally, but are useful for evaluating the current census, determining how best to estimate population by 2030 and helping improve future ones. censuses.

What’s upset the numbers in some states?

During the initial 2020 census, some households may have sent results that included people who should not have been counted, such as someone born after April 1, 2020 or someone who has just visited the country.

The COVID-19 pandemic has also posed challenges, both in finding enough census workers to collect data door-to-door and in the reluctance of residents to open the door to someone they did not recognize.

“Every decade there is room for improvement, and this one – especially with the unprecedented challenges we have faced as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic – is no exception,” Santos said. .

Another possible difference was a change in technology, said Ed Ratledge, director of the Center for Applied Demography and Survey Research at the University of Delaware.

For the first time, residents could respond to the online census nationwide, and not just in a limited pilot like in 2010, Ratledge said.

However, census questionnaires were also mailed to residents as usual.

Ratledge said it’s possible some households completed both the paper survey and the online survey, resulting in duplicate counts. Perhaps a family member saw the census form in the mail and sent it in, unaware that another family member answered an online questionnaire.

Follow-up surveys are done to try to eliminate duplicate counts and to see if historically under-reported areas have been counted accurately.

Still, Ratledge was surprised at how far the count was in Delaware.

“Five percent was a big number, but that’s why they’re doing more surveys so they can correct the census,” he said. “I don’t expect the final numbers to be out until April 2023.”

Why are numbers important?

Two main programs are determined by the census: redistricting and federal funding to the states.

Ratledge said the redistricting for the election has already been done using the April 2020 numbers, and that won’t change for the next 10 years.

But for federal program funding changes based on population, final numbers for each state must wait until all the data is available.

“Funding is based on combined estimates after reviewing post-census survey, demographics and other data,” Ratledge said. “They won’t just go through the 2020 census. They’re looking at census data, demographics, births, deaths, and migrations. »

The goal of the census is for every state, county, city and town to get its fair share for schools, hospitals, roads and public works projects. These funds are population-based and disaggregated by gender, age, race and other factors.

“The findings also indicate how federal funding is allocated to more than 100 programs, including Medicaid, Head Start, block grant programs for community mental health services, and the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program known as SNAP. “, according to the Census Bureau website.

The Census Bureau works with state employees responsible for estimating annual population in states, counties, cities, and towns under the Federal-State Cooperative Program for Local Population Estimates (FSCPE).

The Census Bureau and CSPF members combine census information and administrative records to produce current population estimates consistent with the latest censuses for the past 10 years. Census estimates are sent to FSCPE agencies for review and comment.

Santos said the 2020 Census Quality Assessment provides a foundation for the Census Bureau’s work to improve the next census — instead of modifying the 2020 census count.

Together, the post-enumeration survey, demographic analysis and quality indicators of the 2020 census provide an overview of the quality of the population census over 10 years.

Redistricting for regional elections

In a special legislative session last fall after the release of the 2020 census figures, the General Assembly approved the final maps of the House and Senate districts on November 1, 2021. Governor John Carney signed them into law the day after.

These maps, which are revised and adjusted every 10 years, are now in effect for the 2022 Delaware legislative elections and are available online at https://legis.delaware.gov/Redistricting

All states must comply with constitutional population requirements while preventing discrimination by diluting minority communities with the Voting Rights Act of 1965, which prohibits redistricting plans from discriminating on the basis of race by diluting the votes of certain minority groups.

Delaware’s population based on the 2020 census is 989,940, so to have nearly equal population districts, each of the 21 Senate districts had to be as close as possible to 47,140 people, and each of the 41 House districts as close to 24,145 as possible. possible.

In an effort to keep communities and neighborhoods intact, some deviation from these numbers is allowed, according to the Delaware General Assembly website, but the goal is to be within 5%, above or below.

Other redistricting objectives include compactness of district boundaries, adjacency of districts, preservation of counties and other political subdivisions, and preservation of communities.

This is the first census in which Delaware has counted prisoners at the last address recorded before their incarceration, rather than at the prison. After working with the Department of Corrections, the Department of Elections provided the legislature with data on the last known addresses of each person incarcerated in a public facility.

Since Delaware has only one U.S. Representative, there is only one U.S. House district, so there is no effect on redistricting at the federal level.

Delaware takes on Montana for another U.S. rep

An additional U.S. representative in Congress could be in play if Delaware’s population grows relative to other states.

Delaware has a U.S. Representative, like other states with small populations, but as the state grows, Delaware may get a second representative like Montana did after 2020 census figures .

The census determines the distribution, the process of distributing the 435 seats of the United States House of Representatives among the 50 states. These results determine the number of seats each state will have in the United States House of Representatives over the next 10 years.

According to the US Census Bureau based on 2020 population figures, seven House seats will move between 13 states. One state, Texas, will gain two seats, and five states will gain one seat: Colorado, Florida, North Carolina, Oregon and Montana, which drops from one representative to two, recovering the second lost seat after the 1990 census.

Seven states will lose a seat: California, Illinois, Michigan, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania and West Virginia.

Of all the states with a U.S. Representative, Delaware now has the highest population of 989,948 according to the April 1, 2020 census.

Montana, which is just ahead of Delaware, had a population of 1,084,225 as of April 1, 2020, up from 989,415 as of April 1, 2010.

Delaware will have the largest average US House district size at 989,948, while Montana will have the smallest average district size at 542,112.5.

So while Montana’s population is only 9.52% larger than Delaware’s, Montana gets 100% more representation in the U.S. House and four electoral votes in presidential elections instead of three. .

The Congressional District’s average population size will be 761,169 using the 2020 census.

Contact reporter Ben Mace at [email protected]

Ukraine says national stimulus package will cost $750 billion

0

Ukraine has said it will need $750 billion to fund a national stimulus package as it strategizes to rebuild its shattered infrastructure and revitalize its economy after war with Russia.

Prime Minister Denys Shmyhal said the Russian invasion caused more than $100 billion in infrastructure damage and demanded that the “main source” of funds for reconstruction be the confiscated assets of the Russian government and its oligarchs.

“The Russian authorities started this bloody war and caused this massive destruction, and should be held accountable for it,” the prime minister said at the Ukraine Recovery Conference in Lugano, Switzerland. “Our goal is not just to restore glass and concrete, but to build a new country.”

Ukrainian officials are meeting with representatives of the European Commission and donors, including the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development in Switzerland, for two days of talks on the costly reconstruction program once the war is over.

The reconstruction plans will involve governments and agencies around the world, including lenders such as the World Bank and the European Investment Bank. The talks were accelerated by the EU’s decision last month to recognize Ukraine as a candidate for joining the bloc.

However, the country’s partners are only in the early stages of identifying ways to finance the huge cost of reconstruction.

The EU is still trying to finalize up to 9 billion euros in emergency aid to help shore up Kyiv’s public finances, before starting to work out how to raise the huge sums needed for longer-term reconstruction.

Shmyhal said funding should come from grants and concessional loans from international organizations and partner countries, as well as from the private and corporate sector, and from Ukraine’s national budget. But he added: “We believe that the main source of recovery should be the confiscation of the assets of Russia and the Russian oligarchs.”

EU member states have frozen just under €14 billion in assets belonging to sanctioned individuals and entities, including yachts, cars and houses, according to figures compiled by the commission. The value of the frozen foreign exchange reserves of the Russian central bank could be much higher.

Russia said in March it had lost access to about half of its reserves, or about $300 billion, after G7 countries imposed sanctions on Russia’s central bank.

Josep Borrell, the EU’s high representative for foreign policy, said in May that he would favor seizing Russia’s frozen foreign exchange reserves and using them for reconstruction, calling such a move “full of logic”.

However, confiscating Russian assets and using them to pay for Ukraine’s reconstruction is legally and politically complex.

US Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen said the confiscation of Russian central bank assets should only be done in coordination with allies and should not be undertaken lightly.

Shmyhal said there would be three phases of the recovery plan – an immediate stage focused on rebuilding basic infrastructure such as water pipes; a second phase of construction of schools and temporary housing; and a final step aimed at the “long-term transformation” of the country and its economy.

Taxing childless to help boost population, demographer says

0

Childless people should pay extra taxes to encourage more people to start families.

That’s according to Dr Paul Morland, a demographer at St Antony’s College at the University of Oxford in England.

He said Newstalk breakfast this system already exists for the most part.

“It’s not that strange: after all, people who don’t have children – in the UK anyway, and I imagine it’s the same in the Republic of Ireland – do not receive family allowances.

“And in many countries in Europe, like France and Luxembourg, you get significant tax breaks for having children.

“So basically all I’m suggesting is what they have, say, in France – which is a higher rate of tax, which is then lightened somewhat to help people who have children … who bear this financial burden”.

Regarding people who cannot have children, Dr. Morland thinks they should be given more help.

“I think all help should be given to people who want children, I think we should spend more on helping people with IVF for example.

“Today, people who don’t have children don’t get child benefits… there are 1,001 reasons why they might not have children.

“But I’ve never heard anyone say, ‘It’s so unfair that I don’t get child benefits because… I don’t want kids, I can’t have kids.

“So it seems to me perfectly reasonable to help people who actually have the burden and pleasure of children through the tax system and the benefit system is perfectly reasonable.

“It’s something we’re already doing, I’m just saying we’re moving towards a more continental model where we’re doing it a bit more.”

And he says the reasons are due to aging populations.

“I think we need more people – and here in the UK we are increasingly short of manpower – everyone from bin men to brain surgeons.

“Census data shows that the world’s population is growing, people of working age are starting to decline.

“The biggest growth is in the over 70s – they need a lot of care – the biggest drop is in the under 5s.

“So we have a problem going down the track,” he adds.

Why the barter system is making a comeback

0

BROOMFIELD, Colo., July 3, 2022 /PRNewswire/ — Although a gardening supplies company, Backyard Farming Supply is committed to staying abreast of relevant economic trends; one of them being the resurgence of the barter system. The barter system has been around since the dawn of time, and it’s about to make a comeback in America as food prices continue to rise. In fact, according to CNN Money, the US Department of Agriculture says food prices could potentially rise 30-50% this year alone. Moreover, they expect this trend to continue over the next four years. As these prices continue to climb, bartering your own produce could be a great way to help you save money and get your food budget under control!

The Barter Argument
Whether you believe in barter as an economic system, it’s hard to argue with its effectiveness. In today’s monetary climate, the fair value of products and services can vary from person to person—and while I might think a $30 the yoga class is worth it $20 to me, another person may think it’s worth it $50. By exchanging goods and services and agreeing to an equal exchange of value, both parties are satisfied; everyone wins. And while cash works great for most of us, cash is also inflation-sensitive – barter offers a way to dodge those pesky price increases.

The growing trend of trade in goods
Growing numbers of people are increasingly exchanging garden produce for goods and services. With rising food prices, the value of local organic produce seems to be increasing rapidly. And starting a garden can add value to the home. One woman recounted trading in her first batch of homemade tomato sauce for two hours of house cleaning and yard cleaning services. A realtor used fresh lemons from his garden to get a free car detail. The list goes on…gardeners need cleaning services and homes need gardening care. By linking supply to demand, you gain cash and fresh organic fruits and vegetables from your garden! Talk about covering both ends!

How to get started with a community exchange
Your local community is a great place to start. When you join a community barter organization, you’ll likely get most of your trade value from your area, at least initially. Eventually, as your reputation grows, you can expand far beyond this regional network to find willing and generous brokers through North America. The fact is, no matter where you live in the world, there are people who will want what you have to offer.

There may be some growing pains, but that’s okay
As with any new business or venture, there may be some growing pains and it may take time to build a strong reputation. However, as long as you don’t overwhelm people and take great care of your customers, there is no doubt that if you are organized and effective in your marketing strategy, you will reach your goals very quickly. Additionally, as more people sign up for this system, more goods will be traded, leading to increased availability of goods, which will help offset costs due to inflation. As everyone gets into the barter game, they’ll also be able to save money by not having to spend so much on things they didn’t really need anyway. After all, you can’t spend what you don’t have!

Come learn with the Backyard Farming family how to grow your own organic food! They can help lower your costs and ensure you have access to the healthiest foods for you and your family. If you’re curious about organic fertilizers and learning what would work best for your garden, check out backyardfarmingsupply.com. Please follow them on Instagram and Facebook @backyardfarmingtips for fun facts and helpful tips.

SOURCE Backyard Farming Supply

Calgary’s smaller-name free agents expected to sign

0

Johnny Gaudreau is obviously the biggest UFA name the Calgary Flames are trying to sign. As free agency approaches, everyone will be on deck to bring the superstar winger back to Calgary for the next eight years and it looks like the Flames are determined; it will depend on what Gaudreau wants to do.

Lost in the shakeup are several key UFAs that played a big part in the Flames’ division-winning team last season. To round out the roster, the Flames will need good complementary pieces, and we asked which lower-name free agent the Flames should sign. The responses were interesting as always.

Lots of free agents waiting on the roster

There are several big name RFAs that need new contracts, including Matthew Tkachuk, André Mangiapaneand Oliver Kylington, but there’s also a long list of UFAs pending on the roster right now. The list includes Ryan Carpenter, Brett Ritchie, Michael Stoneand the four options from this week’s poll.

Trevor Lewis

Despite a great season for the Flames, Trevor Lewis finished last in the poll with just 7.1% of the vote. Mainly a fourth line, but playing in the top six on a stop line with Mikael Backlund in several key games against top-flight offensive teams like the Edmonton Oilers, Lewis has done everything that was asked of him this season. He also showed leadership in the locker room and as a former Stanley Cup winner, his experience is always invaluable.

He’s a player Darryl Sutter loved and trusted, and it wouldn’t be surprising to see him back in a Flames uniform next season. However, he turns 36 next season and is very clearly on the back nine of his career. Lewis may not even want to return for another season at all. If he does, it looks like he’s fitting in well with the team and moving his family again might not be something he’s interested in. He would enter the league at a minimum, so if he is back, that would probably be fine.

Jarnkrok Street

We don’t really feel Jarnkrok Street was worth its acquisition price on the transaction deadline. The Flames sent three draft picks to acquire the Swedish center, and he scored just one goal in a Flames jersey all season. He fitted in as a defensive center first, but he just felt like he wasn’t being used properly. Jarnkrok finished second overall in the poll with 26.8% of the vote.

The only way for Jarnkrok to return to the Flames is to earn less than around $2 million. He hasn’t played well enough to get paid more than that, and the Flames (hopefully) won’t have the space to adapt anyway.

Ideally, the Flames can grab a third-line center and move Jarnkrok to the wing where he should be more effective than he was last season with the Flames. He’s a talented and responsible player, so if he’s back, it would be nice to have him in the last six. However, it will depend on the price with Jarnkrok.

Nikita Zadorov

I was pleasantly surprised by Nikita Zadorov this past season. He played much better than expected, showing his incredible size and physique early on, but then his mobility and attacking potential as the season progressed. He finished third in this week’s poll with 23.8% of the vote.

The problem with Zadorov will again be the price. He is coming off a contract that has earned him $3.75 million and exceeded his expectations. If he’s looking for a raise, the Flames probably won’t be able to afford it. Players like Zadorov aren’t particularly easy to find, and they usually cost a pretty penny to have on your roster. The Flames clearly loved him, so if they bring him back, let’s hope his hit starts with a three and not a four or a five.

Erik Gudbranson

Erik Gudbranson finished at the top of this week’s poll with an incredible 42.3% of the vote. Prior to this season, Gudbranson was widely regarded as one of the absolute worst defensemen in the NHL. He has really struggled in his last few stops in the league and it felt like a very strange decision to sign him this season.

However, you have to give credit where the credit is due, and Gudbranson had a really solid season for the Flames. His highest value minutes came on the penalty spot, playing the team’s second-most PK minutes and 10th-most in the league at 225:49.

At 5-on-5 he was still below par and allowed far more than he generated, but paired with Zadorov, the Flames had a competent and hugely important third pairing. It’s easy to see why and how Gudbranson fell in love with the Flames fan base, but I’m not sure he’s the best option to return to.

By all accounts, he fit in well with the team and the organization, fulfilled a leadership role and was a solid defender for the third pair. But, he’s coming off a $1.95 million contract and will surely be looking for a raise, and I don’t know if it’s necessarily worth paying $3-4 million for a paired third defender who’s basically a specialist. penalties with very low 5v5 impacts.

Brad Treliving explained how his team did a ton of research before signing Gudbranson and felt this could be a great comeback season for him. Maybe we’re just seeing the first leg of a resurgent Gudbranson and he’ll be even better next season. Time will tell us.

Everything revolves around Gaudreau

Hopefully the Flames can finalize an extension with Gaudreau soon so they can focus on signing their other pending free agents. There’s a lot of work to be done with the roster this offseason, and hopefully Treliving can revive it with another division-winning caliber Flames team.

New guidelines released to ensure sufficient housing supply in Carlow

0

The Minister of State for Local Government and Planning, Peter Burke TD, this week released new national guidance for the preparation of local authority development plans in Carlow and across the country.

The revised guidelines aim to ensure that development plans take account of the expected number of homes in an area and that sufficient new homes can be built in key areas of housing demand in Carlow.

Development plans describe where housing, infrastructure and services should be located over a six-year period.

‘Development Plans – Guidelines for Planning Authorities’ is intended as the essential reference manual for anyone who may be involved in the often complex process of producing a development plan for Carlow.

Aimed primarily at planners and elected representatives of local authorities, they will also come to the aid of citizens and development actors.

Welcoming the new guidelines, Minister Burke said:

“These revised planning guidelines will help planners, local elected officials, the public and the development sector to come up with the best possible plan for Carlow.

“It will also help to ensure that adequate arrangements are made for accommodation, particularly in high demand areas of Carlow. This is crucial at a time when the needs are so acute.

The Minister added:

“Planning and development planning in Carlow can be made much more effective if the process is understood by the public, through open communication accessible to as many people as possible.

“To that end, my department has included numerous infographics as well as relevant case studies of good practices from across the country. I believe this will improve understanding of the guidelines and ensure their effective implementation by Carlow County Council and other planning authorities.

The guidelines, revised for the first time since 2007, include:

  • A clear approach to ensure that each development plan includes a long-term sustainable housing strategy in line with national housing goals and policies
  • A clear method of identifying and zoning land for new housing, and prioritizing land that can most quickly and appropriately provide new housing. Longer-term development areas and strategic development sites that require more infrastructure works can also be facilitated for development in the future.
  • Confirmation that land that is serviced and available for construction of new housing should be kept as such, rather than dezoned
  • A shift towards targeting housing production and delivery
  • Facilitating development activity in cities and urban areas that creates compact, integrated communities, assists in the regeneration of brownfield sites, activates virgin land reserves for housing, and supports the creation of places and the growth of sustainable communities . This approach is underpinned by the new residential property tax introduced as part of the Finance Act 2021 – which will apply where land zoned and serviced for housing remains undeveloped.
  • Assistance to Carlow County Council and other local authorities and communities to adapt key national policies, such as Town Center First and the Climate Action Plan, into their local development strategy. The formulation of specifically tailored local goals and policies can greatly assist in accessing key funding opportunities to enable local development initiatives.

Minister Burke added:

“A number of important issues raised in the submissions received have been incorporated into the final set of guidelines and I would like to thank everyone who took the time and effort to contribute to the consultation. This has greatly assisted us in producing what I believe will be a significant step forward in the quality of plan development over the next few years. »

The release of the revised guidelines responds to a commitment made in Housing for All, the government’s 2030 housing plan, to finalize the Section 28 guidelines on developing development plans.

The plan contains a series of actions and measures aimed at ensuring the construction of more than 300,000 new social, affordable and affordable rental and private housing units by 2030, supported by more than 20 billion euros of guaranteed public investments. until the end of 2026.

The data shows that notices of commencement were received for the construction of more than 30,000 homes between June 2021 and May 2022, which is 18.5% more than the corresponding 2020-2021 period.

The preparation of a development plan is a core function of Carlow County Council, where important choices regarding the future development of the area are made for the next six years.

Developing a development plan is a key exercise in local democracy, which includes community input at various stages of the two-year preparation process, to produce the framework for local planning decisions.

A copy of the Development Plan Guidelines for Planning Authorities can be downloaded from the ministry’s website. here

ADVERTISEMENT – KEEP READING BELOW

Emancipation of women or demographic control? Why abortion was legalized in India in 1971

0

The history of abortion rights in India dates back to the Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act (MTPA) of 1971. It is often considered a landmark moment in Indian social legislation, opening the doors, as many would say, to social reform. The adoption of the MTPA as early as the 1970s is often opposed in the West, where abortion rights continue to be debated. The politics surrounding the law, however, show that it was less a product of India’s women’s movement and more a means of controlling the country’s growing population. The wording of the law and the arguments advanced in its favor remain heavily criticized by Indian feminists.

Colonial discourse on the criminalization of abortion

The legalization of abortion in the 20th century contrasts sharply with attitudes towards the issue in 19th century colonial India. Historian Indira Chowdhury in her article “Delivering the Murdered Child”: Infanticide, Abortion and Contraception in Colonia India” (2006) cites negative attitudes towards abortion within the 19th century European medical fraternity that blamed it on the lack of morality among Indians.

In the words of Allan Webb, Professor of Descriptive and Surgical Anatomy at Calcutta Medical College:

“Perhaps no country in the world has sacrificed so many infants as India, and no human race has more generally practiced the abominable act of murdering children while still in the womb of their mother.The art of producing abortion and all its long series of evils, upsetting both the order of nature and the end of being, is still practiced only too openly. that the strong arm of a humane government has done much to cleanse the country of the loathsome strain of child murder, it has not been able to reach that more common and secretive practice of abortion.

Another example of a similar analysis of abortions in India, cited by Chowdhury, is that of Norman Chevers, who was secretary of the medical council of Fort William, Calcutta. In a handbook written in 1856, Chevers noted that the vigilant control of Hindu society over the conduct of its women, particularly in regard to the prohibition of the remarriage of widows, resulted in too many abortions.

The colonial discourse on the lack of morality among Indians found a response from nationalists who claimed that while India had a glorious past, it had been corrupted by the presence of colonialism.

In their attempt to solve the problem, the British in 1860 added Act XIV to the Indian Penal Code with Sections 312 to 318 criminalizing abortion. Article 315 criminalizes any “act done with intent to prevent a child from being born alive or to cause it to die after birth. Section 316 noted that “causing the death of an unborn child by an act amounting to culpable homicide.”

Discourse on population control in the 20th century

During the third decade of the 20th century, a narrative emerged, both among the Indian elite and in international discourse, that India was an overpopulated country. Historian Matthew Connelly in his article, “Population Control in India: Prologue to the Period of Emergency” (2006) note, “Westerners preferred to make India an example when they developed their own theories and learned from them for policy.”

“In the 1920s, when American and British writers began to warn of a ‘rising tide of colour’, India was once again the most often cited example, even though there was still no evidence that its population was increasing rapidly.” he adds. In the 1930s, western birth control activists like Margaret Higgins Sanger focused on opening birth control clinics in India.

Chowdhury in his article notes that in those early years of India’s population control experiments, abortion was rarely prescribed as the existing penal code prohibited it. Moreover, population control remained exclusively focused on the family as a reproductive unit. “Abortion was seen primarily as the termination of an illicit and illegitimate pregnancy that was often the fate of unmarried women and widows and found little place in this (family planning) discourse,” she writes.

A similar caution against abortion was also maintained by western birth control activists. Sanger, for example, spoke of birth control in a 1935 radio conference as a “means to prevent” and “not to destroy”. She repeated to her listeners that out of birth control, she didn’t want to interfere with life after it started.

Legalize abortion

The issue of legalizing abortion was first raised at the International Conference on Family Planning in Bombay in 1952. The argument for decriminalizing abortion was woven around the fact that it was necessary to offer the same in safe and scientific terms. HS Mehta, who has advocated for abortion, said the legislation would allow qualified doctors to offer it scientifically.

There was also the issue of population control which had a role to play. In 1964, the Indian Parliamentary and Scientific Committee under the chairmanship of Lal Bahadur Shastri proposed that abortion be permitted as a remedy for contraceptive failure.

In September 1964, the government set up the Shantilal Shah Committee to examine the issue of abortions across the country and recommend whether a law was needed. “The Committee traveled the country for two or three years and realized that many women with unwanted pregnancies were using unsafe methods and therefore dying. They proposed to the government that there should be an obligation to liberalize abortions outside the Indian Penal Code,” says Dr Suchitra Dalvie, Consultant Gynecologist and Coordinator, Asia Safe Abortion Partnership.

In 1967, the report of the Shah’s Committee was sent to all states for comments. While most states opted for the bill or remained silent, the only opposition came from the DMK government of Tamil Nadu.

On November 17, 1969, the MTPA Bill was introduced in the Rajya Sabha by S Chandrashekhar, who was then Minister of Health, and DP Chattopadhyay, who was Deputy Minister of Health. Savitri Chattopadhyay in a 1974 article in the Journal of the Indian Law Institute writes, “Interestingly, while the initiative for the MTPA came from a family planning organization, the government and the ruling party in Congress have always championed the bill as social legislation aimed at empowering women.She observes that Chandrashekhar and Chattopadhyay have consistently denied that this should be a population control measure. “The depth of opposition that these ministers had to overcome is indicated by the fact that even among doctors surveyed in West Bengal, 25% opposed the bill,” writes Chattopadhyay. A few doctors were also of the opinion that the Ford Foundation in America was behind the project. Considering the mores of the time, it may have been realized that the bill would be more accepted as a tool for the liberation of women.

DP Chattopadhyay, Deputy Minister of Health who introduced MTPA in 1971 (Wikimedia Commons)

Once in parliament, most political parties took no formal position for or against the bill. The Congress party fully supported the bill.

Chattopadhyay, who introduced the bill in 1971, defended it by observing that four million induced abortions take place every year and that ‘swadharma’ must be in accordance with ‘yugadharma’ or the spirit of society. . He was supported by other members of Congress such as GS Malkote, Bishwanarayan Shastri and Mukul Banerjee.

A voice of opposition came from Jana Sangh member Man Singh Verma, who argued that the MTPA would disrupt society “leading to more corruption and more sex crimes” (quoted by Savitri Chattopadhya). He argued that birth control must come through self-control and that while women were the worst victims of Indian society, the MTPA would not lead to their emancipation.

Some Kerala congressmen have also opposed the bill, although the party has not taken an official position on it. MM Joseph, who was a member of the Lok Sabha of Peerumedur, described the abortion as practically “murder”.

The Marxist Communist Party (CPM) opposed the bill on the grounds that it seemed “lukewarm” in nature and evidence of the ruling party’s hypocrisy. Party member AP Chatterjee instead called for the full recognition of women’s rights, her decision to terminate a pregnancy without the consent of any guardian or abide by the conditions set out in the bill.

Opposition from different fronts, however, could not jeopardize the passage of the bill given the strength of Congress in both houses of Parliament.

The MTPA has stated that “pregnancy may be terminated by a licensed physician, if the duration of pregnancy does not exceed twenty weeks”. The conditions laid down included “the continuation of the pregnancy would entail a risk to the life of the pregnant woman or serious damage to her physical or mental health; or if there is a substantial risk that the child will be born suffering from a serious physical or mental abnormality.

In addition, the law states that a termination of pregnancy can be obtained if “a pregnancy occurs as a result of the failure of a device or method used by a woman or her partner for the purpose of limiting the number of children or to prevent a pregnancy” or “when a pregnancy is alleged by the pregnant woman to have been caused by rape.

The amendment to the MTPA in 2021 raised the upper abortion limit from 20 to 24 weeks for rape victims, incest victims and certain other categories of women such as the disabled and minors.

The wording of the law has been heavily criticized by feminist organizations and women’s health groups. “The problem is that all the conditions of the law are not determined by the pregnant person but by the doctor,” says Dalvie. “So all the power is still in the hands of the doctor and not the woman.” Dalvie also points to the fact that the amendment increased the upper limit to 24 weeks for certain women considered victims. “But if abortion is safe after 24 weeks, it must be accessible to everyone. Otherwise, it’s a way of saying that if we got pregnant with consent, then we will be punished.

Further reading:

Indira Chowdhury, “Rescuing the ‘Murdered Child’: Infanticide, Abortion, and Contraception in Colonial India” in Science and the Raj: A Study of British IndiaOxford University Press, 2006

Savithri Chattopadhyay, Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act 1971: A Study of the Legislative Process, Journal of Indian Law, 1974

Geetanjali Gangoli, Reproduction, Abortion and Women’s Health, Social scientist, 1998

NBS trains agricultural census enumerators in Nasarawa

0

The National Bureau of Statistics (NBS) says it is training 52 enumerators to conduct the National Agricultural Sample Census (NASC) in Nasarawa State.

The Federation’s General Statistician, Adeyemi Adeniran, said this during the enumerators’ training on Friday in the state capital, Lafia.

Mr. Adeniran, represented by NBS Nasarawa Bureau Chief, Bem Benjamin, said the exercise was aimed at equipping surveyors with the skills required to generate accurate agricultural data for the country.

He said the data generated will help the government plan effectively to eradicate hunger and ensure food security in the country.

Mr. Adeniran added that other stakeholders who needed statistics for various purposes would also benefit from the agricultural census.

He explained that 3,096 enumerators were trained across the country to conduct the census within 50 days of training.

According to him, four enumerators each will be assigned to cover 40 clusters in each of the 774 local government areas across the country.

He called on stakeholders, especially local government presidents, to help enumerators in their localities carry out their mission.

Daniel Agyeno, Nasarawa State Commissioner for Finance, Budget and Planning, who declared the formation open, said it was historic as the last exercise was in 1993/1994.

Represented by the Acting State Statistician General, Isa Abdul-Osama, the Commissioner said the census would provide uniform, complete, accurate and reliable agricultural data for Nigeria.

“Through the Agricultural Census, producers can show the nation the value and importance of agriculture and can influence decisions that will shape the future of Nigeria’s agricultural sector.

“So, to ensure there are robust and reliable statistics, we are determined to put in place a system that will eliminate the attitude of falsifying information,” he said.

The Commissioner advised investigators to do their best to obtain accurate data from the field that would help refocus agricultural statistics for effective service delivery.

(NOPE)

DED announces recipients of HOME, National Housing Trust Fund project approvals for housing development

0

Program Year 2021 Announcement of Project Approvals from HOME CHDO, HOME LIHTC and National Housing Trust Fund

The Nebraska Department of Economic Development (DED) announced recipients of more than $3.5 million in federal funding for affordable and low-income housing development through the following programs:

  • The HOME Investment Partnerships Fund Community Housing Development Organization (HOME CHDO) program, administered by the DED to support nonprofit organizations specializing in the development of homeownership units for low- to middle-income households.
  • The HOME Investment Partnerships Fund Rental Development Program, through which the DED works with the Nebraska Investment Finance Authority (NIFA) to allocate tax credits and HOME funding to projects that develop affordable rental housing throughout the state.
  • The National Housing Trust Fund (HTF), through which the DED works with NIFA to allocate tax credits and funding from the HTF to the development of rental housing to benefit ultra-low-income households statewide .

Today’s project approvals include $1,555,000 in HOME CHDO funding, with recipients listed in Table 1.

Table 1 HOME Community Housing Development Organization (HOME CHDO) Investment Partnership Fund Beneficiaries and Project Activities, 2021

Table 1

The beneficiaries of today’s HOME rental development project are shown in Table 2, HOME’s total approval of $1 million.

Table 2 Beneficiaries of the HOME rental development project and project activities, 2021

Table 2

Finally, current HTF recipients are shown in Table 3, total HTF approval of $1 million.

Table 3 National Housing Trust Fund Beneficiaries and Project Activities, 2021

Table 3

For more information about these programs, visit opportunity.nebraska.gov.

Population Health Management (PHM) Market 2030 | The industry is growing due to the increasing incidence of chronic diseases

0

Reports and data

Population Health Management (PHM) Market was valued at USD 24.82 Billion in 2021 and is projected to reach USD 74.61 Billion by 2030, growing at a CAGR of 13.0%.

NEW YORK CITY, NEW YORK, USA, June 30, 2022 /EINPresswire.com/ — According to current reports and data analysis, the global population health management (PHM) market was valued at 24.82 billion USD in 2021 and is projected to reach 74.61 billion USD by 2030, at a CAGR of 13.0%. The growing acceptance of IT healthcare solutions for population health, an increase in the incidence of chronic diseases such as diabetes, obesity, hypertension, cardiovascular and other diseases and the benefits of tools PHM such as remote health management, data integration and data storage are driving the population health management market.

Population health management software combines clinical, financial, and operational data from across the organization and provides providers with actionable analytics to help them improve efficiency and improve patient care. On April 29, 2019, Hendrick Health System, a nonprofit healthcare provider in Abilene, Texas, expanded its relationship with Allscripts to create a single, integrated clinical and financial patient record, which includes the Sunrise suite of solutions , including Sunrise Financial Manager, Sunrise Ambulatory Care, Sunrise Abstracting, Sunrise Health Information Manager, Knowledge-Based Charting, consumer/patient engagement platform FollowMyHealth, Allscripts Identity Manager and Allscripts Patient Flow with Census Logic. The combined technology and single platform will help deliver patient information to healthcare system physicians across the ambulatory care continuum.

Inquire for sample report @ https://www.reportsanddata.com/sample-enquiry-form/1523

Other key findings from the report suggest:

• The medical industry is rapidly moving from a paper-based system to a digital system, which is accelerating the demand for healthcare IT services. Additionally, the growing demand for solutions supporting value-based care delivery by stakeholders has driven the shift from fee-for-service (FFS) models to value-based payment (VBP) models.
• In August 2020, Allscripts, a global healthcare technology leader, announced that it had achieved full accreditation with the Healthcare Network Accreditation Program (HNAP) for Allscripts PayerpathTM as well as ePAP accreditation for ePrescribe from the Electronic Healthcare Network Accreditation Commission (EHNAC). EHNAC’s HNAP accreditation recognizes excellence in healthcare data processing and transactions and ensures compliance with industry-established standards and HIPAA regulations
• In January 2017, Conifer Health Solutions announced that Alameda Health System (AHS) had engaged the company to provide value-based care services to support HealthPAC, a comprehensive health access program for eligible enrollees of Alameda County, California. Conifer Health will provide population health management and nursing consultation services to help the four-hospital system better serve a population of 33,000 HealthPAC members
• Population Health Management (PHM) market is fastest growing with a CAGR of 6% in Asia-Pacific due to rising prevalence of chronic disorders, increased expenditure, surge in healthcare infrastructure and small government initiatives to make it more digitized
• Service segment holds the largest share, valued at USD 16,390.3 million in 2020, as hospitals and other healthcare providers prefer an in-house system instead of involving third parties to assess their patient data
• The payers segment is growing at a robust CAGR of 26.3% in 2020 and is expected to continue similarly during the forecast period. Payers are third-party entities, for example, insurance companies, that finance or reimburse the cost of healthcare services and the growing demand for PHM software for payers is expected to propel the growth of this segment.
• Europe is the second largest region with a share of 25.2% due to the high acceptance rate of population health management platforms in countries such as Germany, the United Kingdom United due to high public awareness of the benefits of PHM, immense public-private investment towards chronic disease management, developed healthcare infrastructure and high disease incidence
• Web-based segment held the largest market share in terms of revenue i.e. USD 10653.7 million in 2020, followed by cloud-based segment i.e. 6392 $.2 million attributed to minimum software and hardware requirements for the use of web-based PHM solutions and the growing adoption of web services by healthcare providers
• North America regional segment dominated this market with 50% share through immense strategic initiatives, mergers and acquisitions, government funding to focus on improving national health following with population health precision

Key players:

Anecova, Allscripts Healthcare, LLC, Cerner Corporation, Conifer Health Solutions, LLC., Health Catalyst, i2i Systems, IBM, Koninklijke Philips NV, McKesson Corporation and Optum, Inc.

Request Custom Report @ https://www.reportsanddata.com/request-customization-form/1523

Market segmentation :

For the purpose of the study, these reports and data have segmented the global Population Health Management (PHM) market on the basis of product type, delivery mode, application, end user and regional perspectives:

Regional Outlook (Revenue, USD Billion; 2019-2030)
• North America
• Europe
• Asia Pacific
• Latin America
• Middle East and Africa

Product Type Outlook (Revenue, USD Billion; 2019-2030)
• Software
• Services
o After-sales services and maintenance
oConsulting services
o Training and education services
o Implementation Services
Delivery Mode Outlook (Revenue, USD Billion; 2019-2030)
• Web-based
• Cloud-based
• On the site
Application Outlook (Revenue, USD Billion; 2019-2030)
• Patient-centered medical center (PCMH)
• Complete longitudinal patient file
• Effectively coordinate care
• Patient awareness
• Others
End-Use Outlook (Revenue, USD Billion; 2019-2030)
• Suppliers
• Payers
• Employer groups

Download Report Summary @ https://www.reportsanddata.com/download-summary-form/1523

Key points covered in the report:

• Detailed analysis of the global Population Health Management (PHM) market through an assessment of key market aspects such as technology, product type, application, end-use, and overall dynamics Of the industry.
• Qualitative and quantitative analysis of the market estimate and CAGR calculation for the forecast period.
• Overall assessment of market dynamics with emphasis on drivers, restraints, opportunities and limitations.
• Detailed profiling of key companies operating in the market including company overview, financial status, product offerings, product portfolio, recent products and technological advancements and business expansion plans.

Thank you for reading this article. You can also get chapter wise sections or region wise report coverage for North America, Europe, Asia-Pacific, Latin America, Middle East & Africa.

About reports and data:

Reports and Data is a market research and consulting firm that provides syndicated research reports, custom research reports and consulting services. Our solutions are uniquely focused on your goal of locating, targeting and analyzing changes in consumer behavior across demographics, across industries and helping customers make a smarter business decision. We offer market intelligence research ensuring relevant, fact-based research across multiple sectors including healthcare, technology, chemicals, power and energy. We are constantly updating our search offerings to ensure that our clients are aware of the latest trends existing in the market. Reports and Data has a strong base of experienced analysts from a variety of areas of expertise.

Tushar Rajput
Reports and data
+1 212-710-1370
write to us here
Visit us on social media:
Facebook
Twitter
LinkedIn

HUD to label “problem” projects in new verification rule

0
By Nate Beck (June 27, 2022, 9:25 p.m. EDT) – The U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development aims to better assess problems with Section 8 housing projects and more frequently check on landlords for changes to a recently published final rule.

HUD on Friday completed a final rule changing the way it conducts its management and occupancy reviews, where an agency official oversees HUD-assisted projects to ensure they meet contract terms. The agency’s final rule comes after seeking comments on the proposed rule in 2015. The new regulations come into effect on September 26.

The new rules are intended to address HUD’s inconsistent assessments of the projects it supports. Running…

Stay one step ahead

In the legal profession, information is the key to success. You need to know what’s going on with customers, competitors, practice areas and industries. Law360 provides the intelligence you need to stay an expert and beat the competition.

  • Access to case data in articles (numbers, filings, courts, nature of lawsuits, etc.)
  • Access to attached documents such as briefs, motions, complaints, decisions, motions, etc.
  • Create custom alerts for specific article and case topics and more!

TRY LAW360 FREE FOR SEVEN DAYS

Southern Resident Killer Whales haven’t had enough to eat since 2018

0

The endangered southern resident killer whale population is not getting enough to eat, and it hasn’t been since 2018, according to a new UBC study.

Animals have been energy-deficient, on average in spring, summer and autumn, for six of the past 40 years, meaning that the energy they get from food is less than they expend. Three of those six years occurred in the most recent years of the study, 2018 to 2020. The average difference in energy is 28,716 calories, or about 17% of the daily energy required for an average adult killer whale. , according to the authors.

“With the southern resident population at such a low level, there is a sense of urgency for this type of research,” says lead author Fanny Couture, a PhD student at the Institute for Oceans and Fisheries (IOF) and OceanWise. “Killer whales and Chinook salmon, the primary prey of the Southern Resident, are important and iconic species of Canada’s west coast. Studying what is happening to the population can help come up with solutions, both for southern residents and potentially for other killer whale populations in the future.

The southern resident population, which feeds primarily on Chinook salmon, numbered 73 individuals in October 2021, compared to an increase in the northern resident population of around 300. Studies have suggested that the growth of the southern resident population may be hampered by a lack of food. .

Researchers analyzed how changes in the abundance, age and size of chinook, coho and chum populations that southern residents feed on in the Salish Sea and on the west coast of the island of Vancouver influenced the daily food consumption of killer whales from 1970 to 2020 for three seasons each year.

The study used estimated declines in Chinook salmon abundance and size to show that low availability of these fish likely resulted in energy deficits in killer whales. “The years when southerners were energy-deficient are also years when other studies report a lower population growth rate and higher mortality rate for killer whales,” says the co- author, Dr. Villy Christensen, professor at IOF.

Previous research has shown correlations between the abundance of Chinook salmon and the survival rate and fertility of southern residents. The decline in chinook salmon abundance could be attributed to many factors, Couture says, including the effects of climate change, greater susceptibility to disease and predation by other animals.

The model also predicted that southern residents would consume more chum salmon than chinook during years when chinook was at low levels, showing that animals could switch to other salmon species when the abundance of their main prey decreases.

Lead author Dr Carl Walters, professor emeritus at IOF, said the commercial fishery for Chinook salmon in Canada was curtailed in the late 1990s following observations of a decline in plenty. “These declines have continued despite severe reductions in the fishery, and one very likely candidate for causing them is the massive increase in Steller sea lion abundance since the mid-1980s; these sea lions now consume more fish than all commercial fisheries in British Columbia for all species combined.

Still, the dire situation for southern resident killer whales may require a reduction in catches of larger chinook salmon, which predict if southern residents are low on energy, Dr. Christensen said. This could include promoting fishing techniques that increase the survival of larger fish.

Other factors that could influence prey availability for southern residents include underwater noise pollution from boats that could affect foraging, Couture says. This could be an area for future research. The researchers could also apply their model to the northern resident population to determine if they too suffer from an energy deficit.

The model did not include winter, as it is not known where southern residents are during the season. The study was published in PLOS ONE.

Language(s) of the interview: English (Couture, Christensen, Walters), French (Couture)

Why we conduct a school census — Ogun SUBEB –

0

The Executive Chairman of Ogun State Universal Basic Education Board, Dr. Femi Majekodunmi clarified that the ongoing national personnel audit program for public and private basic schools, otherwise known as census school, is not about taxation or financial audit, but rather having the total number of teachers, students, infrastructure in all primary and secondary schools in the state to obtain useful information for planning purposes.

The NPA program is a collaborative exercise of the Universal Basic Education Commission and Ogun SUBEB.

It started on May 29, 2022 and will end on July 1, 2022.

Majekodunmi made this known during the audit follow-up exercise in selected schools in Yewa South and Obafemi Owode local government areas, stating that the objective of the program was to address the insufficient collection of data for effective planning and implementation in the education sector.

“The personnel audit will provide complete and reliable data on school-aged children enrolled in primary and secondary schools, to enable the government to have a database of pupils, students and the staff of public and private basic schools in the state,” he said. said.

Majekodunmi, in a statement made available by Chief Information Officer, Tolulope Ogunjimi, called on private school owners to cooperate with education officials responsible for carrying out the audit to provide information of first-hand on the categories of educated people and to determine the challenges with qualified and unqualified people. teachers.

He instructed officers on the ground to work hard to ensure that all schools involved are captured in the state, noting that due attention should be given to proper data collection.

In response, UBEC Acting 2022 NPA Team Leader Malam Abubakar Sahabo said the objective of the audit was to have the total number of teachers, students and infrastructure in all basic and junior high schools in the state to enable the government to plan adequately for them.

In their remarks, the principal of the school of St. Joseph’s Catholic Church in Ilaro and the owner of the private school ASSLAW, respectively Kajola, Adekunle Babatunde and Aminat Abayomi, pledged to support the government in implementing successful implementation of the audit.

Moody’s economist says housing correction – not a crash – is underway

0

(Stock)

Much higher mortgage rates will drive home prices down in “juice” markets such as Phoenix and Tucson Arizona, the Carolinas, northeast Florida and Boise, Idaho, but won’t end up doing fall in prices overall, a leading economist predicted this week.

Bloomberg reports that Mark Zandi, chief economist at Moody’s, made the prognosis at a housing policy summit in Washington, D.C., where he said a lack of mortgage defaults and sales in difficulty would prevent prices from falling too much.

“That’s when you have crashes, when you have a lot of foreclosures and a lot of struggling sales,” Zandi said at the event. “It just won’t happen.”

Zandi noted that housing vacancy rates, which reached historic highs before the financial crisis that led to the Great Recession more than a decade ago, are at historic lows and that the quality of underwriting this time around is high, most loans are plain vanilla 30 or 15 year fixed rate products. Therefore, there is no sign of subprime or negative amortization before the latest foreclosure crisis.

On top of that, the preponderance of speculation and reversal is relatively low nationwide, easing concerns.

Low mortgage rates and a lack of housing inventory during COVID-19 shutdowns have sent home prices skyrocketing in recent years — a trend that is expected to slow as the Fed tightens policy and rates rise. mortgages are approaching 6%. The central bank has raised rates in recent months in an effort to reduce inflation rates that have hit their highest level in decades.

The 30-year mortgage rate hit 5.81% this week, according to Freddie Mac data as reported by the New York Post, from 3.02% the same week a year ago.

Rising interest rates have already caused a slowdown in the housing market according to Lending Tree senior economist Jacob Channel.

“Fewer people are getting mortgages, homes are staying on the market longer, and some sellers are cutting prices,” Channel told the Post.

However, the prices are not yet affected. The National Association of Realtors said the median sale price for existing homes was $407,600 in May, up 14.8% from a year ago.

[Bloomberg] — Vince DiMiceli

Indianapolis Population Falls, Concerns Rise – Indianapolis Business Journal

0

Two decades of steady growth came to an end in Indianapolis last year when the city experienced a shrinking population, raising some concerns about its economic future.

The drop of 5,600 residents between July 2020 and July 2021 occurred during the pandemic, when the deaths of more than 1,200 people in Marion County were blamed on the coronavirus during the same period. During this time, the practice of remote work took hold, which may have influenced departures from the city.

Bill Osterle

Observers have differing views on the reversal of a growth trend that saw Indianapolis’ population jump from 782,000 in 2010 to 887,600 in 2020. The 2021 population figure is 882,000 .

Bill Oesterle, founder of two worker recruitment companies, TMap and MakeMyMove, said the scale of the population decline was concerning.

“In cities across the United States, we’re seeing the pandemic hit the urban core,” Oesterle said. “Indianapolis has not been isolated from this, and that’s troubling.”

Michael Hicks, director of the Center for Business and Economic Research at Ball State University, views population growth as the strongest single sign of regional economic health.

Michael Hicks

When reviewing the 2021 data, Hicks said the first post-COVID population adjustments are underway. Citing the rise of remote work as an important development, Hicks said population patterns could emerge over decades.

“It’s entirely possible that we’re in for a long period where traditional patterns of household relocation will continue to be tested,” Hicks said. “We’re going to see a different pattern emerge, so there are more people living in places they want to live and not caring about the job options available to them.”

Matthew Kinghorn, senior demographer at the Indiana Business Research Center at Indiana University Kelley School of Business, analyzed US Census Bureau data on counties and cities this spring.

Matt Kinghorn

Kinghorn said an estimated net emigration of more than 9,200 people from Marion County was the “main driver” of population decline in Indianapolis.

He is not ready to declare that remote work is an important factor.

“It’s far too early for me to be able to say whether or not people have been able to take advantage of remote work situations to move to less populated areas,” Kinghorn said.

Portia Bailey-Bernard, vice president of economic development at Indy Chamber and mayor’s appointee for economic development, said the city’s declining population isn’t too alarming. Bailey-Bernard notes, for example, that the occupancy rate for multi-family buildings in downtown Indianapolis is 93%.

“We know cities across the country have seen a decrease during the pandemic,” Bailey-Bernard said. “Indianapolis has not been unique in this population loss, and I don’t anticipate a decrease in the years to come.”

Portia Bailey Bernard

Popular suburbs

Westfield tops the list of fastest growing cities in Indiana with a 7.7% population increase from 2020 to 2021. The Hamilton County community has become one of seven cities in the states United States to top 50,000 in 2021. Jeffersonville, an Indiana suburb of Louisville, Kentucky, has also joined the 50,000 club.

Four communities in the Indianapolis metro area followed Westfield on the state’s fastest-growing list: Whitestown, with a 7.4% increase; McCordsville, 7%; Avon, 5.7%; and Bargersville, 5.4%. A trio of Lake County communities in the Chicago metro area landed in Indiana’s Top 10 fastest growing cities: St. John, up 4.9%; Cedar Lake, 3.9%; and Winfield, 3.7%.

“It’s been the story for a while in Indiana, but a handful of metro areas are fueling the state’s entire growth,” Kinghorn said.

Fishers and Carmel each passed the 100,000 population mark for the first time in 2021.

Supported by these suburbs, the Indianapolis metro area has fared well relative to the population growth of other Midwestern cities.

Between 2010 and 2020, the Indianapolis metro area grew 9.97%, a rate that trailed only Louisville (12.87%), Columbus, Ohio (10.2%) and Minneapolis (10. 05%).

In 2021, the Indianapolis metro area grew 0.6%, surpassing Columbus (0.5%), Cincinnati (0.1%), Louisville (0.0%), Detroit (a decline of 0.5 %), Cleveland (a decrease of 0.5%) and Chicago. (a decrease of 1%).

Efforts are underway to bolster the population of the Indy area.

In December, the White River Regional Opportunity Initiative — which includes Marion, Hamilton, and Madison counties as well as the communities of Zionsville and McCordsville — was selected as a recipient of a $20 million Accelerator Initiative grant. and regional economic development focused on the White River.

“We have this amazing natural convenience,” said Bailey-Bernard, an Indy Chamber executive. “We could have a real opportunity to do something with this riverside.”

Some commerce officials see developments such as the Bottlewoks District as key to attracting new residents to Indianapolis. (IBJ Photo/Eric Learned).

Choose your place

Ball State faculty member Hicks said work-from-home policies give people a wider range of options for choosing where to live.

“Instead of moving to a bigger house in the suburbs when you have kids, people potentially move before they have a family,” Hicks said. “And they may be looking for different things. They may be looking for really affordable housing or a hobby farm somewhere. If you only have to be at work in Indianapolis one day a week, then you could live in Muncie or Portland or South Bend or Marion or Terre Haute.

In downtown Indianapolis, Hicks predicts unused offices will be turned into apartments.

“I think companies might say, ‘Maybe what I’ll do is turn half of these office spaces into short-term apartments,'” Hicks said. “When I hire someone, I give them six free months in my apartment to research Indianapolis and figure out where they want to be. That kind of innovation is coming. This will be what many high-end workers will be looking for.

Oesterle, who co-founded Angie’s List, said the era of remote work poses challenges for downtown businesses.

“There are knowledge workers who don’t need to be on site, and they realize they can avoid a drive and parking lot and all that,” Oesterle said. “Downtown is going to have to work hard to improve its appeal to people.”

Bailey-Bernard said the future can be seen in the 16 Tech and Bottleworks developments that combine workplaces with quality-of-life amenities. Next comes the transformation of the historic Stutz Motor Car Co. industrial complex and the Elevator Hill campus that once housed the headquarters of Angie’s List.

“We are seeing a shift from our traditional downtown towers to more neighborhood-like office space,” Bailey-Bernard said. “Places that have all the conveniences: going to the office, going to work out, having a beer after work, going to the movies, going to a restaurant.”

Launch Indiana

Overall, Indiana added 20,300 residents in 2021 to reach a total population of nearly 6.81 million. Indiana Business Research Center demographer Kinghorn said 20,300 represents the state’s smallest increase since 2015 and falls short of Indiana’s average annual gain of 30,000 in the previous decade. .

Oesterle summarizes the situation by saying, “The state is not growing fast enough.

Raising birth rates and expanding refugee resettlements are two ways to increase the population, Oesterle said.

In terms of attracting workers, Oesterle said anyone in Indiana can present the state as a place to live.

The Indiana Destination Development Corp. recently unveiled its “IN Indiana” campaign which provides free marketing resources to any business, small town, city and destination. The idea, according to Visit Indiana, is to create a unified message to attract new residents and tourists.

“Communities are going to have to develop the capacity to market themselves,” Oesterle said. “They haven’t had to in the past, and now they have to.”•

N187 billion earmarked for 2023 census insufficient -NPC – The Sun Nigeria

0

National The Population Commission (NPC) has the N187 billion earmarked for the 2023 Population and Housing Census scheduled for April 2023 which is insufficient for the exercise.

Its Acting Director General, National Population Commission (NPC), Mrs. Ugoeze Mbagou, during a panel discussion organized by the National Institute for Legislative and Democratic Studies (NILDS), yesterday in Abuja on the theme: “ The 2023 Population and Housing Census: Issues, Challenges and Way Forward’ said the census is going to be a digital exercise, therefore, the amount required is far in excess of N187 billion.

“What we need is much more than that (187 billion naira). That’s why we might need an additional budget. What held up the census this year was getting government approval for us to do it. The president, graciously with the council of state, declared that we could do a population and housing census. We asked for about 187 billion, which is not enough, but with the green light from the federal government, we are asking for an additional budget.

“And since there is an endorsement from them and they appreciate the importance of a census, I don’t think funding will be an issue with the help of the United Nations Population Fund (UNPF) and other donor agencies. We rely 50% on us and 50% on our development partners,” she said.

The acting DG further said that the commission would begin a trial census on Monday, June 27.

“The trial census is based on geopolitical zones; six states in the federation will have 100% complete census coverage while the rest of the states will have a local government area.

She said the commission succeeded in demarcating 772 local government areas out of the 774 in the country.

“We have not delineated two LGAs in Borno and Zamfara due to the security challenge,” Mbagou said.

MP for Chester hails new affordable housing development

0

TWENTY-TWO new affordable family homes in Upton Dene, Chester, were hailed by Chester City MP Chris Matheson during a tour of the properties.

The Labor MP visited the Upton Dene site on Liverpool Road to celebrate the completion of Weaver Vale Housing Trust’s first homes in the city.

The Trust has taken possession of 11 affordable apartments and family homes and 11 three-bedroom homes for sale as condominiums on the site. The 22 affordable homes are part of a larger Morris Homes development consisting of 74 new homes being built during this phase.

The homes are part of the trusts commitment to provide 800 new affordable homes by 2026 in Cheshire and Warrington.

The condominiums’ starting price of £209,000 for a three-bed terrace compares to properties in Upton averaging £307,969 overall over the past year.

Shares between 25% and 75% will be available, so much lower deposits will be required compared to standard auction houses.

Jo Fallon, Deputy Director of Development at Weaver Vale, said: “Chester is a beautiful and desirable place to live. The earlier than expected addition of these new homes will be welcome as they crucially increase the number of affordable homes in the area.

Weaver Vale has partnered with developer Morris Homes on the project. Upton Dene is now the fourth collaboration between the two Cheshire-based organisations.

The homes available for sale will be managed by Prospa Homes, the condominium arm of Weaver Vale Housing Trust.

Chester City MP Chris Matheson said: “It was a pleasure to visit Upton Dene and see the huge progress that has been made. As we face a national housing crisis, truly affordable housing have never been more important, and I commend the work that has been done to deliver these properties to Chester.

“There is a real sense of community in Upton Dene, and I know it will be a positive addition to the town. Many thanks to Weaver Vale for taking the time to show me around.”

Commission votes to reduce cougar populations in northwest Montana | 406 Politics

0

The Montana Fish and Wildlife Commission on Wednesday passed quotas for cougar hunting over the coming season, including an effort to cut populations by 12.5% ​​on a swath of northwestern Montana.

Earlier this year, the commission passed significant changes to the mountain lion regulations. Hunters can apply for either a limited permit for an area that allows hunting for the entire season, or an unlimited regional permit that will be hunted on a quota.

Previously, seasons varied by region, with Northwest Montana Region 1 being managed by special permit; Mid-West Region 2 managed by a special permit hybrid followed by a hunting quota for all lions not killed by permit hunters; and the rest of the state under a quota system.

With the commission adopting new seasonal structures in place, this left Montana Fish, Wildlife & Parks with the job of coming up with quotas.

People also read…

“Our overall intention in our approach in recommending quotas this year is largely to try to retain the harvest that we have had in recent history,” Brian Wakeling, head of the game management office, told the commission. of FWP.

The exception, Wakeling said, is in northwestern Montana. As part of a new management plan, the ministry convened its first working group in March to make recommendations on management targets and quotas. In future years, task forces will be formed to make similar recommendations in other parts of the state.

The group focused on the ecosystem of northwestern Montana, covering Region 1 and part of Region 2, with an estimated lion population of around 1,400 – a number the group’s report acknowledges includes a some uncertainty and notes that populations are variable across the region. FWP estimates populations using modeling by combining harvest from hunters, information from previous studies, and capture-recapture programs to estimate lion density. Density is then compared to habitat quality.

The fundamental goals of the report call for management that minimizes “excessive” ungulate predation, helps recruit struggling ungulate populations, maintains healthy lion populations, and satisfies hunters and non-hunters alike. The group’s recommendation calls for a 12.5% ​​decrease in lion populations with a focus on certain identified focal areas for “struggling ungulates or reducing urban conflict with lions”.

“Based on our modeling efforts and the population estimation procedures we use, we have made recommendations to try to achieve this goal,” Wakeling said. “So it’s not a 12 to 13% increase in the quota; what he’s trying to do is increase the quota, increase the harvest, so that he’ll achieve that within the 5-6 year lifespan (of the plan).

For all Regions 1 and 2, FWP sets its harvest target at around 350 cougars. Wakeling pointed out that many areas typically do not meet quotas due to remote hinterland or other factors limiting access. The recent average harvest for the regions combined is around 250 cats.

Mac Minard of the Montana Outfitters and Guides Association testified in favor of the measure as the final piece after the season’s structure changes.

Opponents expressed concerns about how the FWP tracks mountain lion mortality and pointed to the importance of large carnivores in the ecosystem. KC York, with Trap Free Montana, said cougars killed by incidental trapping should be counted in quotas. Animals can only be legally captured by hunting.

The committee adopted the quotas unanimously.






Tom Kuglin is deputy editor of the Lee Newspapers State Bureau. Its coverage focuses on the outdoors, recreation and natural resources.

“A Credible List”: Recommendations for the Secretary-General’s 2022 Annual Report on Children and Armed Conflict – World

0

Attachments

Introduction

Twenty-five years ago, the international community launched an urgent appeal to protect children affected by armed conflict. Horrified by the findings of Graça Machel’s landmark study on the impacts of war on children, the United Nations General Assembly established the Mandate on Children and Armed Conflict (CAAC) in December 1996.

Since then, the CAAC program has grown to become one of the largest, most dynamic and widely supported multilateral initiatives within the UN system. It provides international policy makers with a unique set of tools to promote the protection of children in times of war and to combat serious violations of their rights.

Among these tools is the annual report of the Secretary-General on the situation of children affected by armed conflict (“annual report”), which has been presented to the Security Council every year since 2000. The main objective of this report is to draw conclusions draw the attention of UN Member States to the grave violations committed against children and their perpetrators. With its resolution 1379 (2001) and subsequent resolutions on children and armed conflict, the Security Council instructed the Secretary-General to include in his annual reports a list of parties to armed conflicts who commit the following grave violations against children: children: recruitment and use; kill and maim; rape and other forms of sexual violence; attacks on schools and hospitals; and kidnappings. The Council further strengthened this system in 2005, when it established a single global monitoring and reporting mechanism (MRM) to rigorously collect and verify information on grave violations against children in armed conflict. .

The registration mechanism, which draws its evidence base from the MRM, has been another important tool for the protection of children in armed conflict. It is a key first step towards accountability by clearly identifying warring parties responsible for grave violations against children in armed conflict. The mechanism also serves as the basis for the UN to engage with warring parties, secure concrete commitments to end and prevent violations through UN action plans, and create tangible and positive change for war-affected children.

Despite significant progress, children continue to suffer the devastating effects of armed conflict. In 2020, the UN documented nearly 24,000 grave violations against children. More children live in conflict zones than at any time in the previous two decades. The rapid expansion of the global counter-terrorism agenda threatens to dismantle established laws and norms for the protection of children’s rights, and the COVID-19 pandemic has further exacerbated children’s vulnerability to grave violations and other abuses. Some governments have taken steps to avoid accountability for committing grave violations against children; this includes exerting political pressure to avoid being quoted in the Secretary-General’s annual report on children and armed conflict.

In recent years, civil society organizations and UN member states have raised concerns about the process of determining who is included in the report’s annexes. They noted that any politicization of listing decisions threatens to undermine the credibility of the report and weaken its strength as a tool for promoting accountability and respect for applicable international law. Of particular concern are the inconsistencies found between the data on violations included in the narrative of the annual report and the parties listed in its annexes, the notable non-listing of certain parties, the listing of parties for only certain violations described and the de-listing. . parties that have not yet fully met the criteria specified in 2010. In March 2021, a panel of internationally respected child rights experts echoed these concerns after undertaking an independent review of listing decisions and removal of the Secretary General between 2010 and 2020.

Since 2017, Watchlist on Children and Armed Conflict (“Watchlist”) has published an annual guidance note with recommendations to the Secretary-General on parties to conflict who have committed grave violations against children and who should be included in the annexes of the next annual report. . The annual Watchlist Policy Brief also makes recommendations on which parties should be further investigated and which national situations should be included as “other situations of concern” in the Secretary-General’s annual report.

With this sixth edition of its annual policy brief, Watchlist reiterates its call on Secretary-General António Guterres to publish a comprehensive, evidence-based list of perpetrators that accurately reflects data collected and verified by the MRM, applying the criteria of 2010 for listing and delisting without discrimination and in a consistent manner in all national situations. Watchlist also calls on Secretary-General António Guterres to draw the attention of the Security Council to other situations of concern for children affected by armed conflict, by including them in his annual report.

In the context of the 25th anniversary of the CAAC’s mandate, Watchlist further urges all stakeholders to redouble their efforts to create a better future for all children, especially those affected by war. Specifically, Watchlist calls on the UN, its member states and civil society to build on progress made to protect children in armed conflict by upholding and enforcing existing protection frameworks, strengthening prevention efforts conflict and promoting accountability for and to children.

20,000 foreign nationals in Japan have only completed primary school, census says

0

According to the results of the latest national census, about 20,000 foreign nationals living in Japan have not completed lower secondary school and have only completed primary school, prompting the government to call on municipalities to strengthen measures to promote evening school.

According to the census released at the end of May, a total of 804,293 people in Japan aged 15 and over had only graduated from primary school or had dropped out of lower secondary school as of October 2020. Of these, 19,731 – or 2.5% – are foreign nationals.

In an age of both misinformation and too much information, quality journalism is more crucial than ever.
By subscribing, you can help us tell the story well.

SUBSCRIBE NOW

PHOTO GALLERY (CLICK TO ENLARGE)

UN Goose Management Task Force meets in Helsinki to discuss population trends and joint action

0

The annual meeting of the European International Working Group on the Management of Geese under the Agreement on the Conservation of African-Eurasian Migratory Waterbirds AEWA will be held in Helsinki from 21 to 23 June 2022. AEWA and its groups Individual Species Working Group (ISWG) are important for Finland in terms of the protection and sustainable use of migratory waterbirds and coastal birds in Finland.

The meeting will review the most recent data on goose population trends and decide on possible further action regarding populations under the mandate of the European Goose Management Platform.

With regard to barnacle geese, the subjects that will be discussed include the impacts of their shooting under derogation on the development of different populations. For bean goose, greylag goose and pink-legged goose, member countries where they are hunted will agree on future hunting quotas. In Finland, the bean goose and greylag goose are considered game bird species. The majority of bean geese breeding in Finland belong to the taiga bean goose subspecies, for which an international management plan has been introduced. In October-November, large numbers of tundra geese also migrate through southeastern Finland. Topics to be discussed also include damage to agriculture, the task force’s budget for next year, and monitoring and research needs.

The meeting is co-organized by the Ministry of Environment and the Ministry of Agriculture and Forestry. The Finnish delegation is made up of the members of the working group from the ministries, the Finnish Wildlife Agency and the Center for Economic Development, Transport and the Environment of Northern Ostrobothnia, as well as experts and stakeholder representatives from the Finnish Environment Institute, the Finnish Natural Resources Institute, the Centers for Economic Development, Transport and the Environment of Southwest Finland and North Karelia, the University of Turku, the Association of Finnish Hunters and BirdLife Finland.

Collaboration to create a mechanism for sustainable management and exploitation of goose populations

The European Goose Management Platform is an important step forward in international cooperation to protect migratory birds and ensure sustainable hunting. The species concerned by his work include both species in decline and those whose abundance is increasing.

The working group is composed of state representatives and state-appointed experts from 16 countries. The European Commission and the main European stakeholder organizations in the fields of nature conservation, hunting and agriculture are also involved in the work. The objective of the cooperation is to maintain a favorable conservation status of goose populations while reducing, for example, the serious damage caused by certain species to agriculture and the risks for aviation.

What is AEWA?

The purpose of the Agreement on the Conservation of African-Eurasian Migratory Waterbirds AEWA is to promote the conservation of waterbirds and their habitats throughout their migratory range, i.e. breeding, stopover and wintering sites. The agreement is administered by the United Nations Environment Program UNEP. As far as Finland is concerned, it applies both to species protected under the Nature Conservation Act and to all waterfowl considered game which may be hunted.

Source: Ministry of Agriculture and Forestry, Ministry of the Environment

Melbourne’s decline in for-profit sales

0

Melbourne recorded the largest decline in the number of profit-generating home resales for the March quarter, according to Corelogic’s latest Pain & Gain report.

Melbourne’s 100 basis point drop puts it ahead of Sydney with a 60 basis point drop.

The average in Australian capitals for the quarter was a decline of 60 basis points to 93.3%, the first decline in 18 months.

Darwin had the lowest number of home resales making nominal gains, 55.4%, while Canberra had the highest at 99.7%.

Corelogic’s report analyzed 106,000 home resales during the quarter.

Regional areas remained stronger on average, generating a 10 point increase to 94.2%.

Eliza Owen, head of research at Corelogic, said Hobart and the Australian Capital Territory had the highest nominal gains for the 15th consecutive quarter at 99 and 98.8% respectively.

“Hobart homes have been in incredibly high demand over the past few years, being one of two capitals, along with Sydney, where home values ​​have doubled over the past decade,” said owen.

“Homes and units have been popular, however, conditions in this market may begin to change.

“In April, home values ​​saw the first monthly decline in nearly two years and total listings began to pile up.”

Home sales pain and gain March quarter 2022

Region

Houses resold at a loss Houses resold with profit Units resold at a loss Units resold with profit
sydney 1.1% 98.9% 7.9% 92.1%
Rest of NSW 2.0% 98.0% 1.7% 98.3%
melbourne 0.5% 99.5% 11.8% 88.2%
Rest of Vic
0.5%
99.5%
1.2%
98.8%
Brisbane
0.7%
99.3%
13.4%
86.6%
Rest of Queensland
7.1%
92.9%
10.8%
89.2%
Adelaide
1.3%
98.7%
7.1%
92.9%
Rest of South Africa
7.2%
92.8%
8.1%
91.9%
Perth
9.1%
90.9%
34.4%
65.6%
Rest of WA 16.3% 83.7% 27.7% 72.3%
Hobart 0.8% 99.2% 1.9% 98.1%
Rest of Heap 1.9% 98.1% 3.9% 96.1%
Darwin 19.8% 80.2% 44.6% 55.4%
Rest of NT 17.7% 82.3% 34.1% 65.9%
LAW 0.3% 99.7% 2.5% 97.5%
National 96.2% 3.8% 11.7% 88.3%
Uppercase letters 2.7% 97.3% 13.1% 86.9%
Regional 5.1% 94.9% 8.2% 91.8%

Source: Corelogic Pain and Gain Report, March 2022 Quarter

The sale rate for for-profit homes in the quarter was 96.2%, while that for units was 88.3%.

The rate fell for both types of property nationally quarter over quarter. Median home resale gains were $370,000 compared to $173,000 units.

Units also lost more at $36,000 while homes lost $29,400.

Owens said the figures were due to an increase in apartment building from 2012 to 2017, coupled with changes that led to lower investor demand, compounding nominal losses in downtown markets.

Conditions along regional coasts are changing with the impact of higher interest rates, but profitability is high.

In the March quarter, 99.9% of Geelong resales made a nominal gain, setting a record for the region and the highest among coastal housing markets.

Geelong’s housing value has risen by 33.9% between September 2020 and March 2022 as more investors and developers rush to secure land for housing and to develop commercial and office properties. retail.

In Bendigo, each resale had a nominal gain, for a median of $301,000.

▲ Resales in Geelong during the quarter set a record.

Owens said that consistency could change as recently the regions’ housing market values ​​fell for the first time since 2020 by 0.1 percentage points.

“The price declines in the market signal that there may be a higher likelihood of shortfall sales in the months ahead, although holding periods will play an important role here,” Owens said.

Sydney’s for-profit sales rate has fallen for two consecutive quarters and Owens said the higher cash rate will reduce housing credit and affect prices and profitability.

National housing market values ​​fell 0.1% in May and more recent data suggests the decline is accelerating.

“However, it should be noted that price gains from the current housing market recovery have been very strong,” Owens said.

“It may only be recent buyers who will suffer a loss on the sale compared to those who bought before the recovery.

“Even in a declining market, the magnitude of Australia’s loss sales will be broadly in line with future capital growth trends.”

1% of the State’s Population Has Genetic Sickle Cell Disease | Raipur News

0
Raipur: One percent of the population of Chhattisgarh suffers from sickle cell, a genetic blood disorder. All community health centers, district hospitals and state medical college hospitals have free testing, medicine and consultation services.
An official press release said sickle Cellular anemia patients also receive free blood whenever they need it from licensed blood banks. The state health department recently decided to perform sickle cell test for all pregnant women and children because the patient’s life can be saved if detected in time.
The State Sickle Cell Institute operates in the capital, where there are tertiary care facilities for patients. Physicians and lab technicians across the state also receive sickle cell training.
Sickle cell disease is a genetic disease and it is not due to blood transfusion or malnutrition. There are two types of this disease, sickle cell disease SS and sickle cell disease carrier AS.
Sickle cell disease SS can cause severe pain and discomfort in the patient and may require frequent blood transfusions. But with proper medication by the doctor, the patient can live longer and avoid critical problems.
A sickle cell carrier is called an AS carrier. It is not an illness. In this, the person does not experience any physical pain and does not require any type of treatment. However, if both parents are carriers, their child may be prone to sickle cell disease.
Premarital screening should be done to prevent its spread to the next generation. Screening for sickle cell disease in pregnant women and children is necessary because if detected at the time necessary precautions can be taken. Additionally, for those diagnosed with the disease, their treatment begins in time, which could be lifesaving. When sickle cell disease is detected in childhood, advice and treatment needed
Can be taken. To avoid the disease in the future child, it is very important for a pregnant woman and her husband to pass the screening.
Sickle cell disease is first tested by the solubility method. This control is easily carried out by ANM. And can be done by other health workers in sub-health centers or schools. This is confirmed by the electrophoresis test or the HPLC test or Point-of-care testing (POC).

Biogen and Samsung Bioepis launch Byooviz as biosimilar to Lucentis

0

The treatment offers patients with neovascular age-related macular degeneration a more affordable option, the companies say.

Biogen and Samsung Bioepis launched ranibizumab-nuna (Byoviz), a biosimilar referencing ranibizumab (Lucentis; Genentech) in the US and began collaborations with patient advocacy groups and professional societies, provider engagement healthcare and promotional activity, the companies said in a statement.

“The launch of [ranibizumab-nuna] in the United States marks an important moment for patients, health care providers, payers and the entire health care system. Patients with retinal vascular disorders now have a more affordable treatment option,” said Ian Henshaw, senior vice president and global head of biosimilars at Biogen, in a statement.

“Our research with physicians shows that cost is cited as one of the main barriers preventing patients from starting treatment, with a third of patients unable to afford medication. [Ranibizumab-nuna] has the potential to expand access for patients with retinal disorders that can lead to permanent vision loss, while saving [US] billion-dollar health care system,” Henshaw said.

Ranibizumab-nuna will be commercially available on July 1, 2022, through major distributors across the United States, with a list price of $1,130 per single-use vial to deliver 0.5 mg by intravitreal injection.

This list price is approximately 40% lower than the Lucentris list price.

The FDA approved ranibizumab-nuna in September 2021 for the treatment of neovascular (wet) age-related macular degeneration (AMD), macular edema following retinal vein occlusion, and myopic choroidal neovascularization.

Neovascular AMD, although less common than dry AMD, is responsible for the majority of blindness or severe vision loss associated with AMD, according to the statement.

Anti-vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF) therapies have become the reference treatment for neovascular AMD. However, in the real world, the costs associated with the treatment of neovascular AMD make it difficult to achieve optimal clinical conditions.

“The launch of BYOOVIZ, the first ophthalmic biosimilar in the [United States] marks a key step towards increasing options and reducing the financial burden associated with current anti-VEGF treatments,” said Christopher Hansung Ko, President and CEO of Samsung Bioepis, in the statement. “Samsung Bioepis’ priority is to ensure patients have access to the medicines they need, and we will continue to advance our pipeline to provide greater access to biological treatments, leveraging our decade of experience in the development , manufacturing and marketing of these important biologics. ”

Ranibizumab-nuna is the first biosimilar launched in the United States under the partnership between Biogen and Samsung Bioepis. In addition to the United States, ranibizumab-nuna has also been approved as the first ophthalmic biosimilar in Canada, Europe and the United Kingdom.

The marketing agreement between the two companies relates to 2 candidates in ophthalmology, ranibizumab-nuna and SB15, a biosimilar candidate referencing aflibercept (Eylea; Regeneron).

Ranibizumab-nuna, a VEGF inhibitor, is indicated for intravitreal use and as a biosimilar to ranibizumab injection for people with neovascular AMD, macular edema following myopic choroidal neovascularization and retinal vein occlusion.

Patients should be monitored after the injection, according to the statement.

Additionally, there is a potential risk of arterial thromboembolic events following intravitreal use of VEGF inhibitors.

Reference

Launch of Byooviz (ranibizumab-nuna) from Biogen and Samsung Bioepis in the United States. Biogenic. Press release. June 2, 2022. Accessed June 3, 2022. http://media.biogen.com/news-releases/news-release-details/biogen-and-samsung-bioepis-byooviztm-ranibizumab-nuna-launches

How the agricultural census can strengthen food security | The Guardian Nigeria News

0

Unless policy formulation and implementation in agriculture is data-driven, Nigeria’s quest for food security could remain elusive.

Indeed, experts have insisted that the implementation of the National Agricultural Sample Census (NASC) aimed at capturing agricultural households for proper planning is vital in this regard.

The agricultural census is an integrated system of agricultural statistics whose objective is to provide primary data on the structure of the sector, such as the size of holdings, land tenure and others, which do not change rapidly over time.

According to the recommendation of the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO), the sample census is supposed to be carried out every 10 years, to help the government monitor the evolution of the agricultural sector, but the reports say it was last performed 29 years ago.

Nigeria conducted the last round of agricultural census in 1993/94. Since then, the agricultural data situation in the country has receded and can be described as weak.

According to reports, there has been a lack of intercensal surveys to update the census, hence the need to address the country’s fragile agricultural situation.

Experts say the NACS would provide farmers with the opportunity to be listed based on the crops they grow and their livestock. But despite the benefits, the country failed to complete the exercise to completion, mainly due to lack of funds.

The General Manager of Green Sahara Farms, Suleiman Dikwa, underlined the importance of the sample census; say without accurate data, there can never be good planning.

He said if the Federal Government is sincere, the sample census would address the challenges facing the sector, lamenting that, as is the case in Nigeria, the operators of the interventions are the architects of the manipulation of the system. .

“A resident community-based approach, which collects information and intervenes at the community level, is the solution rather than a third-party approach for agricultural and other interventions.

“Interventions should help gain access for farmers to remove products from the shelves at the community level, in the same way a farmer purchases other goods and services. The system as it exists is too sophisticated for the rural farmer or the small holder.

The Deputy Director/Head of Agri-Statistics Division, National Bureau of Statistics, Abuja, Bishop Ohioma explained that data collection is having an effect in Nigeria’s quest to achieve food self-sufficiency.

He revealed that there are plans to conduct the NASC in all local councils soon, adding that the train-the-trainer exercise is expected to start this month for a period of 60 days, to screen farming households.

“The other is the National Agricultural Sample Survey (NASS), and it is supposed to be annual. The census is supposed to take place every 10 years as recommended by the FAO, the last time it was fact, it was about 28 or 29 years ago. It’s because of the funds. So immediately after the NASC, we will start with the NASS, which was done eight years ago. We will select the farmers to from the list that we will obtain during the census.

Ohioma revealed that the northern part of Nigeria is always willing to provide information when collecting data, adding that the statistics have a ripple effect in the country’s quest to achieve food self-sufficiency.

“We will also be reviewing the food safety situation in all local state councils and should be able to make recommendations to the government. You know that the government is concerned about the food security situation.

“The statistics are an estimate, it is very easy for us to collect data from the North than from the South. NASC and NASS will enhance food security; the problem we have in Nigeria for policy-making is the data problem,” he said.

Green Sahara Farms CEO Dikwa, however, warned that the exercise may not achieve its objective if the right modalities are not adopted.

He said, “On the other hand, the issue is not the census, but the modality deployed to collect the information.

“If the census is carried out and the same actors who compromise the system are hired to collect the information, then the goal is defeated. The general census will take place next year and I assume that the profession will be one of the information required and therefore can serve the same purpose.

A Melbourne company’s innovative solution to Australia’s housing crisis

0
A melbourne company came up with an innovative idea to solve Australia’s problem lodging crisis by building entire houses across 3D printing.

Fortex technical director Jake Hartman said the process is similar to a desktop 3D printer, but on a much larger scale and can build a house in a more efficient timeframe.

“We are able to produce concrete on site, pump it on site and deliver the wall system to a house on site,” he said.

The company 3D prints concrete houses. (9News)
Melbourne company 3D printing houses
The process can take at least 40 hours to print a house. (9News)

It is a printer based on concrete but can use local resources to build the houses.

CEO David Lederer said the system is best suited for a flat surface to build on, but can build houses up to 12 meters.

“It’s a modular system ranging from small houses to 12 meters wide and three stories high and 50 meters deep before you have to move the printer, so infinite depth,” Lederer said.

Hartman added that it gives more “design freedom” to architects because of the ease of building houses of different shapes like curved walls.

“The design freedom it will give to architects and designers will result in a whole new way and style of living because of the different shapes and forms we will be able to see in home construction,” Hartman said.

Melbourne company 3D printing houses
It is hoped that the process will help resolve Australia’s housing crisis. (9News)
Melbourne company 3D printing houses
The process is not limited in size and can build houses up to 12 meters. (9News)

Fortex realized it was possible to build a 210 square meter one-story house in just 40 hours with two days of printer setup before construction.

“That compared to a conventional building of eight to 12 weeks for the wall system, that is to say not counting the delays that all the builders have in terms of supply, now that could explode to 14 weeks for the system wall,” Lederer said.

The company said the technology would not put looms out of business, as workers are still needed to operate the printing system.

It comes as the construction industry is under severe pressure due to shortages of materials and workers and high demand after the COVID-19 shutdowns shut down the sector.

Traffic Laws

Can cyclists ride in the opposite direction on one-way streets?

China Blocks US, India’s Move to List Pakistani Terrorist on UN Security Council

0

China has repeatedly blocked attempts by India and its allies to list Pakistani terrorists in the UN

The United Nations:

China today blocked at the last minute a joint proposal by India and the United States to the UN to list Pakistan-based terrorist Abdul Rehman Makki as a ‘global terrorist’ under the UN Security Council ISIS and Al-Qaeda Sanctions Committee.

Makki is a US Designated Terrorist and the brother-in-law of Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT) leader and 26/11 mastermind Hafiz Saeed.

It is learned that New Delhi and Washington had submitted a joint proposal to designate Makki as a global terrorist under the UN Security Council’s 1267 ISIS and Al-Qaeda Sanctions Committee, but Beijing suspended this proposal at the last minute.

Also earlier, China suspended and blocked offers from India and its allies to list terrorists based in Pakistan.

In May 2019, India scored a huge diplomatic victory at the UN when the world body named Pakistani leader Jaish-e-Mohammed Masood Azhar a “global terrorist”, a decade after New Delhi had approached the global body for the first time. publish.

A permanent member of the UN Security Council with veto power, China was the lone resister in the 15-nation body in an attempt to blacklist Masood Azhar, blocking attempts to placing a “technical suspension”. All committee decisions are made by consensus.

In 2009, India itself proposed to appoint Masood Azhar. In 2016, India again submitted the proposal with the P3 – the US, UK and France in the UN 1267 Sanctions Committee to ban Masood Azhar, also the mastermind of the attack on Pathankot Air Base in January 2016.

In 2017, the P3 nations again presented a similar proposal. However, on all occasions, China, a permanent member of the UN Security Council with a right of veto, prevented the adoption of the Indian proposal by the sanctions committee.

Continuing international pressure to designate Masood Azhar as a global terrorist, the United States, backed by France and the United Kingdom, had proposed a draft resolution directly to the UN Security Council to blacklist him.

In November 2010, the U.S. Treasury Department designated Makki as a Specially Designated Global Terrorist.

As a result of this designation, among other consequences, all property and interests in Makki property that is subject to US jurisdiction is blocked, and US persons are generally prohibited from engaging in transactions with Makki.

“Furthermore, it is a crime to knowingly provide, or attempt or conspire to provide, material support or resources to the LeT Foreign Terrorist Organization,” the United States said.

The US State Department’s Rewards for Justice program offers a reward of up to $2 million for information on Makki, “also known as Abdulrahman Maki. Makki served in various positions within Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT), a company designated by the United States Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO). He has also been instrumental in raising funds for LeT’s operations.”

“In 2020, a Pakistani terrorism court found Makki guilty of one count of financing terrorism and sentenced him to a prison term. The United States continues to seek information about Makki because the Pakistani justice system released LeT leaders and agents convicted in the past,” according to information from the Rewards for Justice website.

(Except for the title, this story has not been edited by NDTV staff and is published from a syndicated feed.)

New MI Group Census Data Highlights Need for Higher EITC / Public News Service

0

The latest county census data revealed that Michigan child poverty rate remains at 19%, and child and family advocacy groups say it’s time to raise the state Earned income tax credit (EITC).

Michigan residents are grappling with inflation, including high food and gas prices, rising child care costs, and other basic needs.

Monique Stanton, president and CEO of the Michigan League for Public Policy, said census numbers show now is an important time to put money in the hands of working families. She noted that almost every aspect of children’s lives improves when their parents are in a better financial position.

“The amount of tax credit you get increases with the number of children you have, and it’s also influenced by your particular income,” Stanton explained. “In Michigan, we have a federal credit rate of only 6%, that’s one of the lowest rates in the country. And we have the ability to raise the rate significantly.”

Stanton noted that lawmakers are the introduction of increases from 20% to 30%. She pointed out that children of color have higher poverty rates, about two to three times higher than white children, and that the EITC is a strategy to equitably reduce child poverty rates.

Matt Gillard, president and CEO of Michigan’s Children’s Group, acknowledged that the state had long struggled with high poverty rates for families with children, even before the pandemic. He said that because EITC money often goes directly back into the local economy, bipartisan groups of lawmakers and the business community are in favor.

“Putting that money back into the hands of working families dramatically improves their position and situation,” Gillard said. “And helps them cover the costs of raising children and helps improve the lives of those children, but also helps local economies.”

Studies have shown that greater access to the EITC leads to lower rates infant mortality, offsets some racial disparities in the tax system, and may even lead to higher incomes for children later in life.

It was shown at improve test resultsespecially for boys, children under 12, black and Latino children, and those whose parents are unmarried.

Disclosure: The Michigan League for Public Policy/KIDS COUNT contributes to our fund for reporting on policy and budget priorities, children’s issues, living wages/working families, and poverty issues. If you would like to help support news in the public interest, click here.

get more stories like this via email

Dish Wireless construction reaches 20% of US population

0

Despite a rocky start, the carrier met its FCC mandated 20% coverage deadline

“Are they going or are they not going?” has been an almost constant question in telecoms for months: will Dish Wireless be able to meet the deadline imposed by the Federal Communications Commission, to offer service to 20% of the population by June 14, 2022? Conflicting rumors confirming Dish’s impending success or failure were released the same day. But before the market opened on Wednesday, Dish confirmed that it had indeed met the FCC deadline, reaching more than 20% of the United States with its new 5G service by June 14. By this time next month, Dish will have filed its build report with the FCC, so we’ll have to wait until then for more granularity. For now, however, Dish seems happy to take the win.

“As of June 14, Dish has provided 5G broadband service to over 20% of the US population. This marks a major milestone in building the world’s most advanced cloud-native Open RAN 5G network, as Dish continues to change the way the world communicates,” the company said in a statement.

Dave May, Executive Vice President of Network Development for Dish Wireless, thanked Dish’s many partners in announcing the milestone. He thanked AWS, Cisco, CommScope, Dell, Fujitsu, Intel, JMA, Mavenir, Nokia, Oracle, Palo Alto, Qualcomm, Samsung and VMware, adding, “We are the only major network in the world built primarily with US vendors. ”

The Dish Wireless rollout got off to a rocky start. Company chairman Charlie Ergen told investors earlier this year that the company’s 5G greenfield network rollout was six months behind schedule.

“Lots of lessons learned”

“I think ultimately we found that we had to become the system integrator. It was not a role we thought we would play. But with all sellers, someone has to be the middleman between them and the glue that holds them together, and we’re a lot more into that than we might realize. So a lot of lessons were learned there, but we’re certainly moving at a very fast pace. Now we probably wasted some time, but it’s my fault,” Ergen said.

It wasn’t until early May that Dish announced its 5G service was available in Las Vegas, provided you were willing to shell out $900 for a Motorola Edge+ smartphone — the only one Dish had qualified to work. Since then, Dish said it has expanded its network to include more than 120 cities across the country. Dish noted that the number of supported devices has tripled, to now include the Samsung Galaxy S22 smartphone and NetGear 5G hotspot. Subscribers should visit Dish’s Project Genesis website to find out if they are eligible for the service and to sign up.

Dish said it was the first service provider in the United States to support Voice over New Radio (VoNR). VoNR is a basic 5G service only available to carriers running standalone 5G deployments. VoNR implements voice calls as end-to-end voice over IP (VoIP) connections managed using a core IP Multimedia System (IMS) architecture. Dish said it will expand VoNR service and features as it optimizes the technology.

“Dish’s 5G broadband service is 3GPP Release 15 Enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB) compliant and operates through Dish’s 5G core,” the company said. “The 20% coverage uses Dish’s AWS-4, Lower 700 MHz E Block and AWS H Block spectrum.”

Deputy U.S. Marshal Adrian Pena indicted for allegedly tracking cellphone locations of personal acquaintances

0
Placeholder while loading article actions

A federal agent has been accused of abusing cellphone tracking technology to seek the locations of people he had personal relationships with – and lying to investigators when confronted, according to an indictment indictment unsealed on Tuesday.

Deputy U.S. Marshal Adrian Pena has been charged in an indictment with 14 counts of misconduct dating back to 2016. Officials say he misused law enforcement data for personal reasons while that he was assigned to a task force with the Uvalde County Sheriff’s Office – one of the law enforcement agencies now under intense scrutiny for waiting more than an hour to confront a gunman who killed 19 children and two teachers at a primary school last month.

As part of his job with the Lone Star Fugitive Task Force in Uvalde, Pena, 48, had access to a database that allowed users to search for the location of cellphones. While the database was meant to be used only for legitimate law enforcement work, Pena used it “numerous times … to obtain location data associated with the cell phones of his personal associates, including persons with whom Pena was or had been in a personal relationship and their spouses,” according to the indictment.

He was charged with 11 counts of criminally obtaining telephone recordings, two counts of making a false statement and one count of tampering with a recording. He made a brief appearance Monday in federal court and was released.

Police slammed for response to Uvalde school massacre

Officials say that when Pena was confronted and questioned in 2017 by the Justice Department’s Inspector General’s Office, he lied and claimed he was not using the database for personal reasons. He reportedly said he occasionally accessed the database to help friends find their cellphones or to assess whether the system was working properly.

“I did, tests, tests on my phone,” Pena told officers, according to the indictment. “The times I’ve used it, again, to find a lost or misplaced phone.”

When asked specifically if he used the system to find the location of a family member, friend or former girlfriend, Pena said no, which prosecutors allege is a lie.

After being questioned by the officers, Pena allegedly arranged a face-to-face meeting with one of the people whose phone he found and persuaded her to sign a document stating that she had given Pena permission to search. his phone information. The indictment alleges that the written statement was false and intended to obstruct the investigation into Pena’s conduct.

It was not immediately clear – and officials would not comment – why it took nearly five years to charge Pena, during which time he apparently remained a paid employee of the Marshals Service.

Federal prisoners’ bank accounts leave more than $100 million unreviewed

Pena reportedly used a service provided by Securus Technologies, which provides telephone services to prisons but also gave law enforcement the means to track the location of cellphones. The system required law enforcement officials seeking to track the location of a cellphone to upload an official document proving that they were authorized to search for that data.

Prosecutors accuse Pena of circumventing this requirement by uploading documents that had nothing to do with the clearance, including “blank pages, award certificates, a list of justifications for a merit promotion, templates letterhead” and more.

“These documents were unofficial and did not authorize Pena to obtain cell phone location data,” the indictment charges.

Asked about the charges, Securus released a statement saying the company discontinued this tracking system more than four years ago “and permanently discontinued it. Even when it was operational, it was only available to users who had received permission from a law enforcement agency or institution. The tool was built with safeguards and security protocols, but we also relied on the integrity of law enforcement to operate it ethically.

The company said it believes “privacy and security are fundamental…and we will never provide the service again, period.”

Pena did not immediately respond to an email seeking comment, and court records did not mention an attorney representing him. A Marshals Service spokeswoman did not immediately comment on the charges. A spokeswoman for the Office of Inspector General referred the questions to the Department of Justice.

Intelligent location of craft breweries using census data

0

Recent data from the Brewers Association identifies market dynamics that continue to pinch craft brewing.

As summer dawns, factors such as supply chain delays may be evident, while the impact of the nearly 50% drop in barley exports from Ukraine may not being.

Northern Colorado utility data scientist Abiah Shaffer developed a consumer profile model for a study area in Phoenix to examine the demographic trends of its craft beer consumers. (Abiah Shaffer/Courtesy image)

Broad market forces like these have long been speed bumps for craft brewers, and even where craft beer is plentiful, small brewers and startups need to know what they’re getting into before risking savings. retirement.

Geodemographic business data often reflects key information in this effort, revealing where a new brewery could have the most success, despite outside market influences.

Abiah Shaffer, a Northern Colorado utility data scientist, grew up in Fort Collins. And he’s been interested in craft beer for a long time. This passion led her to focus a master’s thesis on the value of geodemographic spatial data in the planning of start-up craft breweries. “If you have to study something for two years, why not beer? Shaffer joked about his dissertation – Demography in Location Intelligence: A Study in Craft Brewery Site Selection (UMI number: 1595465).

Despite the exponential growth of the craft beer industry since 1980, Shaffer has noticed that the failure rate for breweries remains high. According to data from the Brewers Association pre-COVID-19, there was a 48.5% failure rate for breweries and a 24% failure rate for microbreweries during this period.

Many factors that often determine the success of a craft brewery are location-related, for example, changes in demand, low production, and limited availability or acquisition of ingredients. These observations led Shaffer to see the potential business benefits of applying geodemographic information to site selections, similar to how marketers target new product launches.

“Geodemographic data” is a class of spatial data built on layers of population segments linked to location-based criteria, such as where individuals live, work, shop and their demographic profiles. Analyzing this data involves classifying and ranking target audience data segments, relative to locations such as a potential brewery site.

Craft brewers rely on the engagement of their local community by appealing to ‘neo-local’ sentiment, providing a unique atmosphere and beers that local customers see themselves in. Neolocalism spurs “buy local” efforts and often gives new traction to a brewery in a location. Shaffer speculated that this intersection of interests could be leveraged to make informed business start-up decisions.

Theoretically, the integration of location science and GIS modeling can enable a new or satellite craft brewery to choose an ideal location that takes advantage of neo-local sentiment and market opportunities. Shaffer’s approach employs a traditional marketing use of demographic data, as well as identifying where that data overlaps with the area of ​​influence of existing craft beverage establishments.

Shaffer began by developing a consumer profile model for a study area in Phoenix and examining the demographic trends of its craft beer consumers, including the top reasons a consumer visits a craft brewery; the distance a consumer is willing to travel to visit a brewery, and the correlations between proximity to home, work, shopping, or other destinations and a consumer’s decision to visit a brewery.

In the age of “big data,” including deep data from the US Census Bureau, the information to create and compare these market layers exists. “Census data is difficult to use, however,” Shaffer said. “Manuals are written on how to put them together, how to interpret them and how to manipulate them.”

Successful analysis therefore usually requires commercial software or consultants. Nevertheless, an investment in good planning can help avoid losing a larger investment later, as Shaffer’s study found for a model location that seemed ideal based on area factors but turned out to be the opposite by digging into the geodemography of the market.

“We’re all looking for acceptance and like-minded people,” Shaffer said of the importance of this data for business planning. Nevertheless, she recognizes that data alone is not a panacea; it is inherently subjective how and when surveys are conducted, and the cultural biases of study subjects.

Data can also be used to perpetuate population divisions, targeting corporate placements in ways that frustrate rather than strengthen communities, and further reinforce psychographics (i.e. the similarity of spirit of a market).

Post-COVID, many non-demographic factors also became influential in the successful establishment of a craft brewery, including outdoor spaces, distribution and packaging routes, price level, and “economic cluster” dynamics. related to the production of similar products, for example, seltzer water and hard cider.

Nonetheless, knowing who your customer is and where they spend time has always been essential to successfully opening a new business, craft beer or otherwise. Shaffer’s research and the availability of commercial tools to study census and other geodemographic data make this exercise easier than it once was, even if the rest of the global market remains unpredictable.

Cyril Vidergar can be contacted with ideas and comments at [email protected]

Todd: Ottawa increases social housing funds for aggrieved British Columbia

0

Opinion: Yet former mayor and premier Mike Harcourt says Ottawa needs to do a lot more about the housing crisis

Content of the article

Two years ago, NDP MP Jenny Kwan protested that the federal Liberals were spending less than 1% of their social housing budget on British Columbia, when the province is home to 11% of the population of country.

Advertisement 2

Content of the article

The glaring imbalance has improved since Kwan aired his complaints.

But the NDP MP for Vancouver East says British Columbians, who struggle with some of the most expensive housing on the continent and high rates of homelessness, are still not getting their rightful share of social housing funds . The vast majority continue to go to vote-rich Ontario.

“It was shocking to learn that in January 2020, British Columbia was so severely short-changed by the federal government for our fair share of funding for social housing and shelters from the National Strategy Co-Investment Fund housing, the only federal social housing program at the time. “, said Kwan.

“Since I revealed that BC only got 0.5% of the funding, I am happy to report that more funds have started flowing to BC”

Advertisement 3

Content of the article

Kwan, the NDP’s housing critic, isn’t alone in being appalled by the historically low level of non-profit housing money flowing into British Columbia. Former provincial premier Mike Harcourt said last week that the federal Liberals made a huge mistake in 1993 when they canceled those housing programs.

Now, nonprofit housing is needed more than ever, especially given widespread homelessness and addiction in British Columbia, Harcourt said, adding that Prime Minister Justin Trudeau’s record new immigration targets for Canada are also putting intense additional pressure on housing and prices.

  1. Douglas Todd: “Men Are Becoming Disposable:” The Painful Demographics of Homelessness

  2. Prime Minister Justin Trudeau and Housing Minister Ahmed Hussen (standing) want to protect 'mom and pop investors'.  Hussen and 11 other Liberal ministers own several properties.

    Douglas Todd: Trudeau’s crackdown on real estate investors won’t work. here’s why

Compared to the measly 0.5% of funds BC has received in the past for social housing, Kwan’s office provided government data showing that the proportion of that money that went to the province, based on figures from the beginning of last year, climbed to 5.7%.

Advertisement 4

Content of the article

This was equivalent to $135 million in grants and loans to British Columbia from the National Housing Strategy Co-Investment Fund, a branch of Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation.

Meanwhile, Kwan’s aide provided figures showing that last year Ontario received 86% of the fund’s money, for a total of $1.3 billion. Alberta was worse off than British Columbia, attracting only 1.8%.

When Kwan factored in the additional funding from the Ottawa Co-Investment Fund that was “committed,” i.e. pledged based on certain conditions that had to be met, she said the proportion potentially destined for British Columbia last year jumped to 8.6% of the total or $266 million. Ontario, which has three times its population, received $2.4 billion.

Advertisement 5

Content of the article

“While that’s a big improvement from 0.5%,” Kwan said, “it’s still not enough. We’re still below per capita, which is 11%.”

Although the federal Liberals announced a new national housing strategy in 2017 with “great fanfare”, including declaring that “adequate housing is a basic human right”, Kwan said the housing crisis was only getting worse. .

While Harcourt praised Kwan for drawing attention to B.C.’s past shortfall, former Vancouver mayor laments former premier Jean Chrétien’s decision to scrap non-profit housing program of Ottawa, which produced 25,000 low-cost housing units a year (many of them in Vancouver), ensured that 600,000 subsidized units were never built.

Advertising 6

Content of the article

“Now, the Liberals’ increased immigration levels from 250,000 to 400,000 newcomers a year means we need massive catch-up and a well-funded federal housing program, in partnership with government initiatives. provincial funding,” Harcourt said, noting that 75% of immigrants move. in Montreal, Toronto or Vancouver.

“The Liberals’ increase in immigration levels from 250,000 to 400,000 newcomers a year means we need a massive catch-up” in social housing, says former B.C. Premier Mike Harcourt. Photo by Arlen Redekop /PNG

When Postmedia asked federal Housing Minister Ahmed Hussen if he thought B.C. was getting a fair share of social housing money, officials didn’t offer an opinion or release numbers on the payments finalized to British Columbia.

Instead, CMHC media relations officer Leonard Catling said the latest figures, as of March, indicate $899 million has been pledged based on certain conditions that do not have not yet been met, to BC applicants through the Co-Investment Fund to build or repair 6,800 affordable housing units. Of a national fund of $5.3 billion, this equates to 16% for British Columbia

Advertising 7

Content of the article

The federal government’s Place to Call Home website, Catling said, provides more information on how the federal government is providing additional funding to applicants in British Columbia and elsewhere for things like building rental housing and subsidizing rents for “marginalized low-income groups.

Jill Atkey, head of the BC Non-profit Housing Association, said she was encouraged to see increased federal investment in affordable housing, including through CMHC’s co-investment arm. “However, the rental affordability crisis is worse in British Columbia than anywhere else in the country and investments must address this need. We’re not there yet.”

Because land prices are so high in British Columbia, especially in urban areas, Atkey said the amount of federal money spent on building low-cost housing in the province doesn’t go as far as in other parts of the country.

Advertising 8

Content of the article

For his part, Harcourt, who recently penned a commentary for the Vancouver Sun arguing that the City of Vancouver should increase density while avoiding “overdeveloping” certain neighborhoods, praised the B.C. government’s commitment to working with the private sector to create about 11,000 affordable housing units per year.

Ottawa, he said, needs to support the construction of 7,000 more non-profit housing units each year for the province.

The request is urgent.

[email protected]


More news, less ads: Our in-depth journalism is possible thanks to the support of our subscribers. For just $3.50 a week, you can get unlimited, lightweight access to the Vancouver Sun, The Province, National Post and 13 other Canadian news sites. Support us by subscribing today: The Vancouver Sun | Province.

Advertisement 1

comments

Postmedia is committed to maintaining a lively yet civil discussion forum and encourages all readers to share their views on our articles. Comments can take up to an hour to be moderated before appearing on the site. We ask that you keep your comments relevant and respectful. We have enabled email notifications. You will now receive an email if you receive a reply to your comment, if there is an update to a comment thread you follow, or if a user follows you comments. See our Community Guidelines for more information and details on how to adjust your email settings.

Bluffton and Hardeeville continue strong population growth

0

Hardeeville and Bluffton continue to rise as two of South Carolina’s fastest growing municipalities over the past year.

Bluffton ranked No. 1 in the state for total population growth in the U.S. Census Bureau’s 2021 estimates, according to the SC Department of Employment and Labor. Hardeeville was ranked eighth in total population growth and first in percentage growth. Bluffton was second in percentage population growth.

Hardeeville’s population increased by 14.3%, gaining approximately 1,106 new residents. Bluffton’s population increased by 12%, with 3,457 new residents.

South Carolina’s estimated population grew to 5,190,705, an increase of 1.4%. Department of Jobs and Manpower director Dan Ellzey said 26 of 46 counties saw population increases in 2021, but most rural areas saw gradual losses, especially those in the south and east of the state.

Ellzey noted Hardeeville’s growth, adding that SC Revenue and Fiscal Affairs Office projections indicate that the city and county of Jasper will likely become a much larger part of the state’s total population and economy in the years to come.

“This city has increased its population by one-seventh in a single year and is the fastest growing municipality in the state by percentage,” Ellzey said in a news release. “Hardeeville benefits from its proximity to Hilton Head Island and Savannah, making it a very convenient place to live and work.”

City Manager Michael Czymbor said Hardeeville undertook a comprehensive analysis of the proposed development and its potential impact a few years ago.

“This vital analysis has been updated annually and provides insight and guidance in the preparation of our annual budget request and grant applications to meet the need for additional personnel, equipment and facilities,” Czymbor said. “…The City is also working to amend all of our growth management policies and the Municipal Zoning and Development Ordinance to address all of the issues and challenges that come with rapid growth environments.”

Growth is important to the city, Czymbor said, because it creates an attractive environment for business developers trying to attract.

“The city’s ideal proximity to the Port Authority of Georgia makes the US 17 corridor south of Exit 5 an ideal location for storage, logistics and manufacturing,” he said. “The City has licensed over 15 million square feet of industrial space in this area. All of this growth will provide many high-quality, high-paying positions for our residents and Jasper County residents.”

Czymbor said the city is working to limit the impacts of some of the negative elements of growth, such as “increased traffic, pollution and its impact on all of our existing infrastructure and roads.”

“The city, as development proposals are submitted, (requires) a traffic impact analysis and detailed studies of how the current environment and landscape will be affected by the proposed development” , did he declare. “Ongoing due diligence on our part will be required to ensure quality end products.”

Explained | What is the FATF and why is Pakistan on its “grey list”?

0

How is Pakistan aiming to get off the Financial Action Task Force gray list?

How is Pakistan aiming to get off the Financial Action Task Force gray list?

The story so far: Ahead of the plenary session of the Financial Action Task Force (FATF), the global financial crime watchdog, June 14-17 in Berlin, Pakistan, which continues to grapple with an economic crisis, hopes for respite under the form of its removal from the FATF “grey list” or the list of countries posing a risk to the global financial system.

At its last plenary meeting in March, the FATF maintained Pakistan’s listing, calling on it to quickly address remaining shortcomings in its financial system.

What is the FATF?

The Financial Action Task Force is an international watchdog for financial crimes such as money laundering and terrorist financing. It was created at the 1989 G7 Summit in Paris to fill the gaps in the global financial system after member countries expressed concerns about increasing money laundering activities. In the aftermath of the September 11 terrorist attack on the United States, the FATF also added terrorist financing as a priority area. This was later expanded to include restricting the funding of weapons of mass destruction.

The FATF currently has 39 members. The FATF’s decision-making body, known as its Plenary, meets three times a year. Its meetings bring together 206 countries from the global network, including members and observer organizations, such as the World Bank, some United Nations offices and regional development banks.

The FATF establishes standards or recommendations that countries must follow in order to close gaps in their financial systems and make them less vulnerable to illegal financial activities. It regularly conducts peer-reviewed assessments called mutual evaluations (MEs) of countries to check their performance against the standards it prescribes. Reviews are conducted by FATF and FATF-like regional bodies (FSRBs), which then issue mutual evaluation reports (MERs). For countries that are not performing on certain standards, time-bound action plans are developed. Recommendations to countries range from crime risk assessments to establishing legislative, investigative and judicial mechanisms to prosecute money laundering and terrorist financing cases.

What are the FATF “grey” and “black” lists?

Although the terms “grey list” and “black list” do not exist in the official FATF lexicon, they refer respectively to the countries which must endeavor to comply with the FATF guidelines and those which do not. .

At the end of each plenary meeting, the FATF produces two lists of countries. Gray countries are designated as “jurisdictions under heightened surveillance”, working with the FATF to combat criminal financial activity. For these countries, the watchdog does not tell other members to do due diligence on the listed country, but does tell them to consider the risks these countries pose. Currently, 23 countries including Pakistan are on the gray list.

As for the blacklist, it designates the countries designated as “high-risk jurisdictions subject to a call to action”. In this case, countries have significant gaps in their AML/CFT (anti-money laundering and countering the financing of terrorism) regimes and the body calls on members and non-members to apply enhanced due diligence. In the most serious cases, members are asked to apply countermeasures such as sanctions against listed countries. Currently, North Korea and Iran are blacklisted.

Being on the FATF lists makes it difficult for countries to get help from organizations such as the International Monetary Fund (IMF), Asian Development Bank (ADB) and the European Union. It can also affect capital inflows, foreign direct investment and portfolio flows.

Why is Pakistan on the gray list?

Pakistan was held on the gray list in March because it had yet to address concerns over terrorism financing investigations and prosecutions of top leaders and commanders of UN-designated terror groups. Diplomatic sources in Pakistan said The Hindu that steps had been taken in this direction, such as the conviction of the leader of the terrorist group Hafiz Saeed, the prosecution of Masood Azhar, the arrest of approximately 300 other designated terrorists and the seizure of more than 1,100 properties belonging to terrorist groups. India, for its part, a member of the FATF, suspects the effectiveness and permanence of the Pakistani actions.

Pakistan is currently banking on its potential exclusion from the gray list to help improve the status of difficult negotiations with the International Monetary Fund to secure bailout funds.

Pakistan has found itself frequently on the gray list since 2008, for weaknesses in the fight against terrorist financing and money laundering. In 2009, the country began cooperating with the FATF-like regional body, the Asia-Pacific Group (APG), for an MA process.

At the end of the MA in June 2010, Pakistan made a “high-level political engagement” with FATF and APG to address its strategic AML/CFT deficiencies. He was entrusted with an action plan that required demonstrating adequate criminalization of money laundering and terrorist financing as well as adequate measures to identify, freeze and confiscate the assets of terrorists.

He was delisted in 2015 due to his progress, but was put back on it in 2018. He received a 27-point action plan to restrict terrorist financing activities. After warnings and two deadline extensions on the first plan, Pakistan has been prescribed another seven-point action plan by the APG in 2021, specifically focused on combating money laundering. In March, Pakistan informed the FATF that it had completed 32 of the 34 actions under the two plans, but remained on the list. The FATF gave him time until January 2023 to complete the 2021 plan.

THE ESSENTIAL

Ahead of the plenary session of the Financial Action Task Force from June 14 to 17, Pakistan hopes to have its name removed from the FATF’s “grey list”.

Gray countries are designated as “jurisdictions under heightened surveillance”, working with the FATF to combat criminal financial activity. The countries on the blacklist are “high-risk jurisdictions subject to a call to action”. These countries have huge gaps in their anti-money laundering and anti-terrorist financing regimes.

Pakistan was held on the gray list in March because it had yet to address concerns over terrorism financing investigations and prosecutions of top leaders and commanders of UN-designated terror groups.

Analysts: Lack of affordable housing threatens economy

0

The shortage of affordable housing in Palm Beach County has begun to affect the growth of its economy, to the point that its recent expansion is under threat, speakers said at a housing summit last week.

Some companies interested in relocating their headquarters to Palm Beach County have put plans on hold until the situation improves, said Kelly Smallridge, chief executive of the county’s Economic Development Council, as she was leading a panel discussion Thursday at the Palm Beach County Convention Center.

One company even explored the possibility of buying an apartment building for its employees, but couldn’t because of the cost, she said.

Smallridge said a few employees quit within days of being hired because they couldn’t find housing to match their salary.

“We offer competitive salaries,” said Clinton Forbes, executive director of Palm Tran, the county’s bus system, “but we struggle to hire and retain employees. People want to live where they work, and it’s hard for our drivers to do that.

The starting salary for bus drivers is $65,000, which is potentially enough to buy a house costing around $200,000 on a 30-year mortgage, according to online calculators.

Only a fraction of new housing in Palm Beach County fits “labour” budgets

Analysts have estimated the county’s affordable housing shortage at tens of thousands of homes, condominiums or apartments. Over the past five years, the county has created about 1,000 residence halls for the workforce, a figure County Commissioner Mack Bernard has said in the past is woefully insufficient.

“It’s going to take all of us to preserve paradise,” County Administrator Verdenia Baker said, noting that the county’s population has grown from 863,503 in 1990 to more than 1.5 million.

Housing demand has pushed the median cost of homes to more than $600,000, Baker noted, nearly four times what it was in 1990.

Thursday’s summit came as commissioners plan to ask voters to approve a referendum on the $200 million bond in November to build more affordable housing and for the workforce. Bernard, a panelist, said the bond approval will help create more capacity.

“We desperately need this to happen,” he said, noting that as more units are built, prices will come down. Other commissioners questioned whether it was wise to ask for the bond at a time of high inflation and with money coming from unspent past county housing money.

Bernard, who represents Riviera Beach and parts of central Palm Beach County, also acknowledged the county needs to “use current dollars more effectively.”

Some want to put the $200 million housing bond vote on the ballot

Jack Weir, president of Eastwind Development, another panelist, said the bond issue will provide a dedicated source of funding for developers.

He expects the funds to be used as “gap” financing, which will provide low-interest loans to help pay some of the construction costs for apartments and condominiums. Builders would be required to reserve certain residences at below-market rates.

The county’s Workforce Housing Program aims to create residences that people in essential occupations such as teaching, nursing and public safety can afford.

The rents that can be requested by participating developers are linked to household income: the lower the income, the lower the rent. These rents vary between 60% and 140% of the median family income.

Rents, for example, for a one-bedroom apartment should be capped at $1,318 for households earning up to $63,280. Rent can be as high as $2,306 for a household earning $110,740.

The county requires new residential developments to set aside a percentage of their units for households with qualified income. In exchange, developers can increase the density of their projects, sometimes doubling what the zoning code allows. Rental limits apply to units between one and four bedrooms.

County guidelines apply to unincorporated areas. Some municipalities have their own guidelines.

Nick Rojo, president of Affiliated Development, noted that any solution will have to come from the local or county level. “We can’t rely on Tallahassee,” he said.

Weir noted that the state legislature often took money from a state housing fund to balance the state budget. Backed by the state’s Republican-led legislature, Gov. Ron DeSantis in 2021 signed a bill to divert half of Florida’s affordable housing trust fund — called the Sadowski fund — to pay for housing systems. remediation and sea level rise projects.

Weir and Rojo said developers also need to do a better job of confronting the “not in my backyard” argument, aimed at dissuading city, town and village officials from approving denser, higher-density developments. tall as apartment buildings in neighborhoods dominated by single-family homes. .

“We need to make sure that future tenants of these apartment buildings are represented at public hearings,” Weir said, “so that elected officials understand that there are two sides to this situation.”

Plastic residue shortens mosquito life cycle and facilitates population explosion: The Tribune India

0

Thiruvananthapuram, June 11

In a study carried out in the waterlogged canals that run through the state capital Thiruvananthapuram, a team of researchers found that residue released into the water from plastic waste unravels a chemical environment that allows mosquitoes to complete their life cycle in rapid succession than that of water which is free of plastic waste.

The study was carried out by RV Ayana Gayathri and DA Evans attached to the Department of Zoology, University College Thiruvananthapuram.

The study highlighted that bisphenol A, bisphenol S and phthalates are identified as the main residues released to water from plastic waste.

“Quantitative estimation of bisphenol A (BPA) by gas chromatography and mass spectroscopy revealed that water samples from mosquito breeding sites possess the compound at a concentration of 1 mg/L (1 ppm). At this concentration, BPA can shorten the life cycle of mosquitoes from 13 days to 10 days,” the study notes.

The life cycle of mosquito ends in polluted water and has four stages such as egg, larva, pupa and adult mosquito. Female mosquitoes lay eggs four days after the blood meal on the water surface or on floating wet objects.

The study observed that under the atmospheric temperature range of 26 to 31 degrees, the eggs hatch into larvae after 36 hours.

Technically, the study found that in the presence of BPA, hatching time is reduced to 18 hours.

Mosquito-borne diseases such as malaria, dengue fever, encephalitis, chikungunya and Kyasanur forest disease are major health concerns for people living in tropical countries.

The globe’s equator offers plenty of chances for mosquitoes to survive with heavy rainfall, high humidity, and high temperature. Therefore, the mosquito population density is high in these regions compared to temperate regions.

Anthropogenic factors such as the disposal of plastic waste provide additional chances for mosquitoes to complete their life cycle, as this waste creates stagnation.

Thus, the present study found that instead of providing additional chances of survival, the residue released to water from plastic waste unravels a chemical environment that facilitates the full life cycle of mosquitoes in rapid succession relative to that of water devoid of plastic waste.

“During the peak of summer, the atmospheric temperature is high in the range of 30 to 38 degrees Celsius, while the life cycle of mosquitoes is completed in 12 days, which is further shortened to 9 days by BPA. Mosquitoes typically complete two life cycles within a month, and the presence of BPA in their breeding sites may facilitate the completion of the life cycle within 30 days,” the study notes.

They said this could have far-reaching implications for the mosquito threat and that humans act as facilitators. IANS

Wolf Administration Celebrates Mural Honoring Roberto Clemente, Highlights Continued Commitment to Diversity in Communities

0

Bethlehem, Pennsylvania – Today, the Director of Diversity, Equity and Inclusion for the Department of Community and Economic Development (DCED), Norman Bristol Colón, joined the Lehigh Valley Hispanic Center for the unveiling of a mural commemorating Pennsylvanian Roberto Clemente, a prominent figure in the Puerto Rican community and legendary baseball player.

“Roberto Clemente, who was and still is a Pennsylvanian via Puerto Rico, inspired generations of Americans. This mural elicits a great sense of community pride, ownership and empowerment while embracing and celebrating the rich Latino history of Bethlehem and the Lehigh Valley,” said Director Bristol Colón. “The Wolf administration remains committed to improving opportunities for underrepresented communities to step out of the shadows to enjoy our shared prosperity and building a sustainable future.”

The mural was designed by Salina Almanzar-Oree and is located at 520 East 4th Street in Bethlehem, Lehigh County. This new piece of public art honors Roberto Clemente, who was a professional baseball right fielder who played 18 seasons in Major League Baseball for the Pittsburgh Pirates. Clemente believed in giving back and was heavily involved in charity work in Latin American and Caribbean countries. He was posthumously inducted into the National Baseball Hall of Fame in 1973 after he died in a plane crash while en route to provide relief for earthquake victims in Nicaragua.

The Wolf administration has created many initiatives to help foster diversity throughout the Commonwealth. Two of these initiatives include the 2020 Census Full Count Commission and the Governor’s Advisory Commission for Latin American Affairs.

Director Bristol Colón has been appointed by Governor Wolf as Executive Director of the 2020 Census Full Count Commission. The governor established this commission in 2018 to make recommendations on the most accurate count of Pennsylvanians in the 2020 census, which included accounting for historically undercounted and underrepresented communities. In the 2020 censusPennsylvania’s diversity index rose from 35.3% in 2010 to 44%.

Director Bristol Colón was also accompanied by a representative of the Governor’s Advisory Commission for Latin American Affairs. Created in 2015, this commission is dedicated to advising Governor Wolf on policies and legislation that impact Latino communities.

For more information, visit the DCED website and be sure to stay up to date with all the news from our agency at Facebook, Twitterand LinkedIn.

MEDIA CONTACT:
Penny Ickes, DCED, [email protected]

# # #

5 companies that came to win this week on June 10

0

The week ending June 10

Topping this week’s Came to Win list, Cisco Systems provided a blueprint for its security cloud offerings.

Also on this week’s list are Pure Storage and Nvidia for launching the next generation of their AI-ready infrastructure and Palo Alto Networks for previewing its new autonomous security operations center technology.

Data security startup Immuta is on this week’s list for a successful funding round. And cloud giant Google is on the list for the continued expansion of its data center network to meet growing customer needs for cloud applications.

Cisco Unveils Cloud Security Strategy, Cisco Plus SASE Offering

Cisco took several important security steps this week, detailing its strategy to help enterprises connect their entire security architecture through a new platform and launching the highly anticipated Cisco Plus XaaS SASE offering. (Secure Access Service Edge).

Cisco unveiled these and other security capabilities and services at this week’s RSA 2022 conference.

Cisco Security Cloud, a unified and open standards-based platform, forms the foundation of the future enterprise security architecture. The platform will include large-scale threat prevention, detection, response and remediation and will integrate with third-party technologies. It is intended to provide security in hybrid and multi-cloud environments with capabilities to securely connect people, applications and devices located anywhere.

The new Cisco Plus Secure Connect Now, a unified security and networking offering, provides partners and customers with a turnkey SASE system. Built on the Meraki platform, Cisco Plus Secure Connect Now is the latest offering in the company’s Cisco Plus strategy as a service.

Photo

Pure Storage and Nvidia unveil the next generation of their AI-ready infrastructure

Flash storage developer Pure Storage and technology partner Nvidia this week unveiled the next generation of their AI-ready AIRI framework that combines Pure Storage’s new FlashBlade//S array with Nvidia’s DGX A100 GPU systems.

The companies said the new AIRI//S provides the compute and data storage muscle needed for heavy AI workloads.

Pure Storage and Nvidia pitched the AIRI//S as a simple, on-demand system aimed at accelerating AI initiatives, especially projects that traditionally required discrete server clusters for data analysis for development AI, model training and inference – tasks that a single system running the DGX A100 can do.

Pure also unveiled the new FlashBlade//S: at its Pure//Accelerate Digital techfest22 in Los Angeles this week. The modular version of the company’s FlashBlade file and object storage array for the first time disaggregates compute and capacity to allow customers to scale them as needed.

Additionally, Pure has decided to expand its Evergreen storage subscription service by offering customers the option to purchase separate subscriptions for the company’s hardware and software.

Photo

Immuta Raises $100M – With the Help of Snowflake – in New Funding Round

Security and data access technology developer Immuta raised an impressive $100 million in a Series E funding round this week, bringing its total funding to $267 million.

The round was led by venture capital firm NightDragon. But it’s also worth noting that Snowflake Ventures, the venture capital arm of data cloud company Snowflake, was a new investor in Immuta.

The funding comes as Immuta prepares to accelerate the rollout of its technology across all major cloud platforms. The company intends to apply the new funding to potential acquisitions, research and development, expanding sales and marketing teams, and deepening strategic partnerships within the ecosystem. cloud data.

Photo

Palo Alto Networks Launches New “Autonomous SOC” Technology

Cisco wasn’t the only company making big announcements at the RSA conference this week. At the event, Palo Alto Networks said it has developed “autonomous SOC” technology that will make security operations centers more automated and less dependent on humans.

Speaking at the conference, Palo Alto Networks Founder and CTO Nir Zuk (pictured) said the company was working with about 10 early design partners who installed the new technology in their SOCs.

Zuk said the system relies on AI and machine learning technology — and less on human surveillance — to detect and prevent cyberattacks. Palo Alto Networks uses the new system in its own SOC where it has significantly reduced the number of duplicate alerts about possible security vulnerabilities.

Photo

Google Cloud Accelerates Data Center Push With New Texas Facility

Google Cloud launched a new data center in Dallas this week, marking the company’s 11th region in North America and its 34th availability zone worldwide.

The new Dallas facility is part of Google Cloud’s $9.5 billion commitment to increase its data center footprint, a key part of Google Cloud’s cloud computing growth strategy that also includes a cybersecurity roadmap, redesigning the Google Cloud Marketplace, and eliminating channel partner conflicts.

The new Dallas data center will strengthen Google’s ability to support high-performance partner and customer applications and workloads and improve service availability and business continuity.

Customers can integrate their on-premises workloads with the data center using Cloud Interconnect or multi-cloud options using Anthos. They also have access to systems such as Google Kubernetes Engine, Cloud Storage, Persistent Disk, Cloud SQL, and Cloud Identify.

Mortgage rates on the rise, but relief on the horizon

0

And the pendulum continues its powerful momentum…

After two weeks of declines, Freddie Mac reported that the 30-year Fixed Rate Mortgage (FRM) averaged 5.23% for the week ending June 9, 2022, up from last week when it averaged 5.09%. A year ago at this time, the 30-year FRM averaged 2.96%.

“After little movement over the past few weeks, mortgage rates have risen again due to increased economic activity and incoming inflation data,” said Sam Khater, chief economist at Freddie Mac. “The housing market is incredibly rate sensitive, so when mortgage rates suddenly rise, demand falls again. The significant drop in buying activity, combined with the increased supply of homes at sell, will cause price growth to decelerate to more normal levels, offering some relief to buyers still interested in buying a home.

And the rate hike comes with an expected decline in mortgage application volume, as the Mortgage Bankers Association (MBA) reported that application volume fell to a 22-year low this week, falling by 6.5% week over week.

“Mortgage applications declined as purchases and refinances saw activity decline,” said Realtor.com Senior Economist and Director of Economic Research George Ratiu. “Median-priced homebuyers are looking at a monthly mortgage payment 55% higher than a year ago, adding $695 more to their monthly expenses. Compounding those pressures, nearly 20 states have average gas prices above $5 a gallon, pushing living costs to new heights, especially as employers insist on bringing workers back to offices.

Freddie Mac also reported that this week the 15-year FRM rose, on average 4.38% (averaging 0.8 points), up from last week when it averaged 4. .32%. A year ago at this time, the 15-year FRM averaged 2.23%. The five-year Treasury-indexed hybrid variable-rate (ARM) mortgage also rose this week, averaging 4.12% (with an average of 0.3 points), up from last week. where it averaged 4.04%. A year ago at this time, the five-year ARM averaged 2.55%.

“For many Americans looking for affordable housing, mid-size cities remain a viable alternative, especially as the number of homes for sale has increased, providing new options,” Ratiu said. “The overriding challenge is balancing the ability to find a home at a good price, which often means traveling further from city centres, with the potential need to get to an office. It is up to companies to maintain the flexibility of a workforce that is squeezed from all sides at once, or risk losing employees. The economic outlook depends heavily on the well-being of the American consumer.

Consumers’ outlook for the US economy remains bleak, however, as the latest Fannie Mae Homebuying Sentiment Index (HPSI) remained relatively flat in May – falling just 0.3 points – but closing in on from its 10-year, pandemic low of 63.0 recorded in April 2020. The HPSI measures consumers’ home buying sentiment from Fannie Mae’s National Housing Survey (NHS) in a single figure, measuring their current views and forward-looking expectations regarding housing market conditions. The IPSH found consumers were still concerned about housing affordability, with the ‘Right time to buy’ indicator hitting a new low in the survey, with 79% of respondents saying now was a bad time to buy. to buy a house. Seventy percent of HPSI respondents expect mortgage rates to continue rising over the next year.

“Consumer expectations that their personal financial situation will worsen over the next year hit an all-time high in the May survey, and they expressed greater concern about job security” , commented Doug Duncan, Senior Vice President and Chief Economist at Fannie Mae on the latest HPSI. readings. “Furthermore, respondents’ pessimism about home buying conditions continued into May, with the percentage of respondents saying it’s a bad time to buy a home hit a new high. proportion of people saying it’s ‘easy to get a mortgage’ also fell across almost all segments.”

Nigeria drops the ball on testing population for COVID-19

0

Théophile Abbah and Daniel Adaji

Testing for COVID-19 has dropped dramatically, according to weekly reports from the [i]Nigerian Center for Disease Control (NCDC) which show continued declines in fewer and fewer test records in most of the 36 states and the Federal Capital Territory (FCT). For example, for the week that ended April 17, 2022, 18 states recorded single-digit testing for seven days, indicating that many laboratories licensed to test Nigerians for COVID-19 were inactive in those states. States. From March 6 to April 17, 2022, the number of Nigerians tested for the virus across the country decreased, as shown in the graphs below:

Since February 2020, when COVID-19 broke out in Nigeria, a total of nearly 256,000 cases and 3,143 deaths have been recorded, according to NCDC data. The highest cases of 22,562 and 220 deaths were recorded in Lagos State, followed by 10,291 cases and 202 deaths in neighboring Oyo State. Other high incidence states are Edo (7,694 cases and 321 deaths), FCT (6,385 cases and 82 deaths) and Delta (5,369 cases and 111 deaths). However, these figures are believed to be just the tip of the iceberg due to the low rate of testing for COVID-19 across the country.

In terms of testing trends, it has gone from 1.4 million people tested in January 2021 to as few as 241,174 in the month of April 2022. The drop in testing rate affects the credibility of the number of COVID-19 cases reported in Nigeria. Our World in Data, which produces countries’ 7-day rolling average data on COVID-19, says of Nigeria that “due to limited testing, the number of confirmed cases is lower than the actual number of infections” . Its interactive chart on COVID-19 in Nigeria is expected to inexplicably rise and fall in COVID-19 cases, which can be attributed to random testing for the virus. This downward trend demonstrates the complacency of the government and the institutions vested with the responsibility of carrying out the tests. With a population of approximately [ii]211 million, the test rate of 5,152,011 million is just over 2% of people who should be targeted for preventive testing.

Compared to Nigeria, South Africa has tested as many as 24,885,511, about 40% of its population of 60,756,135. Another African country, Egypt, with a population of 106 million , actually tested 1,318 per million. Both countries have left Nigeria behind in the global citizen test for COVID-19.

However, in Nigeria’s strategy document to combat COVID-19, the government identifies testing as an important element, and the NCDC[iii] recognizes it thus: “Diagnostic tests are an essential response strategy to interrupt the transmission of the COVID-19 pandemic by informing patient care and identifying positive cases, which can then be isolated. The Federal Ministry of Health has prioritized testing as one of the key interventions in Nigeria’s COVID-19 response. In order to quickly contain the outbreak, the Government of Nigeria plans to rapidly expand diagnostic testing to cover all 36 states plus the FCT. The low testing rate contradicts the content of the government’s strategy document.

Testing has been scientifically proven to be critical in containing and mitigating the COVID-19 pandemic, as diagnostic testing helps prevent further person-to-person transmission. With a low rate of testing, NCDC data on the number of infected Nigerians cannot be relied upon as thousands of people may be living with COVID-19 but unaware of it. The World Health Organization estimates that only one in seven COVID-19 infections are detected in Africa. The number of undetected cases not only increases the chances of infection between individuals, but means the virus is likely to spread unnoticed and under-reported.

Why testing is weak in Nigeria

Laboratory scientist Dr Ifeanyi Casmir attributes Nigeria’s low COVID-19 testing rate to the framework put in place, which prioritizes testing in private sector-owned labs over government-owned labs . He argued that owners of labs for COVID-19 testing have raked in billions of naira from inbound and outbound international travelers who are forced by Nigerian authorities to present negative test results for the virus.

He said: “I have proposed that COVID-19 testing should be an integral part of our medical screening and be routine, so that if anyone reports possible cases of colds or malaria in Nigeria, they should be tested for COVID-19. free. As things stand, testing for the virus is not affordable. It costs between N40,000 and N50,000 to perform the molecular tests, which is suspicious. To cover more grounds, testing should be free. This is what is done in [iv]Cameroon. The reality is that COVID-19 has come to stay with us, so testing should be routine. This is all happening because Nigeria’s Medical Laboratory Science Council is asleep. The council is vested with the responsibility to assess and evaluate the laboratory testing centers in Nigeria.

The National Secretary of the Society for Scientists in Infectious Diseases in Nigeria, [v]Dr Solomon Chollom told reporters in March that Nigeria’s testing capacity was compromised by the deployment of low-throughput platforms compared to the use of high-throughput platforms.

He said, “Other possible reasons are the weakness of the surveillance and contact tracing system, the lack of motivation of health professionals and the preponderance of negative publicity that characterized each stage of the response.

A health economist, Dr Abigail Banji, also argued in March that for Nigeria to continue to fight COVID-19 effectively, all relevant agencies must “intensify vaccination, advance rapid self-testing of COVID-19 antigen, access COVID-19 treatment and promote public health and social measures.

She warned that although new COVID-19 cases and deaths were down globally, the pandemic was far from over. “Many countries still have high rates of hospitalizations, deaths, low vaccination coverage rates and high transmission. Nigeria is included. The threat of a new, more dangerous variant remains very real.

The low testing rate appears to have led to the perception that there is a low risk of COVID-19 in Nigeria. Indeed, those who fall ill have no opportunity to get tested for COVID-19 because laboratories are not readily available or the cost is prohibitive. The main method available is molecular testing which, although producing accurate and more reliable results, is expensive, with a relatively long turnaround time of 3-4 days.

“How to speed up testing”

In order to increase COVID-19 testing in Nigeria, virologist Professor Oyewole Tomori advocated for a switch from PCR to rapid tests, which are cheaper and affordable because, with rapid testing instruments, people individuals could even test themselves for the virus. “We need to adopt rapid tests urgently as we need to know the status of Nigerians at a time when several countries are recording cases of new variants of COVID-19. In southern Africa, for example, about five variants of Omicron have already been discovered. If Nigerians are not tested, we cannot detect if we have any of these variants here. With the lull in testing, we feel like Nigeria is out of COVID-19; it is totally false.

Apart from purchasing facilities for rapid testing for COVID-19, Prof Tomori said the National Primary Health Care Development Agency (NPHCDA), responsible for immunization, must devise strategies to ensure that more Nigerians have access to the vaccine, as soon as possible. “We are getting a deluge of vaccines, but Nigerians are not taking them. In the end, many vaccines will expire and be wasted. It’s a tragedy, as far as I’m concerned. »

Data obtained from ONE.org, an Africa data aggregation company, indicates that in April 2022, [vi]Nigeria had received 68.1 million doses of COVID-19 vaccines, but only about half of that amount, 34 million, was used. For vaccination, only about 16.5% of the population was covered, while only about 6.3% of Nigerians received the two doses of COVID-19 vaccines.

However, PHCDA chief executive Dr Fasail Shuab says his organization is not giving up on vaccinations. “We continue to vaccinate Nigerians. Right now, we’re at a point where we’ve surpassed a daily vaccination rate of over 230,000. Last time we got the report, the daily vaccination rate was around 210,000. So, more Nigerians are coming out to get vaccinated. The majority of those wishing to be vaccinated are potential travellers, who are required to present COVID-19 vaccination certificates at exit and entry points.

Dr Ifedayo Adetifa, executive director of the NCDC, did not respond to the inquiry into what his agency is doing to speed up testing, but his office responded to a WhatsApp message, saying: “It has already been established that the Nigerians’ perception of the risk of COVID -19 is generally low, so, in turn, testing will be low. We have made efforts to ensure that states have adequate laboratory supplies and that the use of rapid test kits is scaled up. »

There are around 140 testing centers across Nigeria. However, the [vii]The NCDC’s update for the week ending April 17 shows that 60 of them had no tests or undeclared test results, while many of the test centers that conducted tests COVID-19 have reported between one and two digits of tests for this week.

This piece was produced in partnership with the ONE campaign, a global campaign and advocacy organization. For more on the impacts of conflict, climate change and the impacts of COVID in Africa, subscribe to ONE’s Aftershocks Newsletter Where explore data.

[i] Nigeria Center for Disease Control (ncdc.gov.ng)

[ii] Nigeria population growth rate 1950-2022 | MacroTrends

[iii] COVID19TestingStrategy_2ZWBQwh.pdf (ncdc.gov.ng)

[iv] N50,400 for COVID-19 test in Nigeria, free in Cameroon — Sport — The Guardian Nigeria News – Nigeria and World News

[v] https://von.gov.ng/2022/03/16/only-2-1-per-cent-of-nigerias-population-tested-for-covid-19-ncdc/

[vi] ONE Africa COVID-19 Tracker – Nigeria

[vii] Nigeria Center for Disease Control (ncdc.gov.ng)

North Melbourne Kangaroos, priority pick, roster analysis, draft current order, departure of recruiting staff, Ben Amarfio CEO, David Noble, David Zita

0

How bad is that?

That’s the question the AFL will ask about North Melbourne should the club apply for a priority pick at the end of the season.

If such a question seems too broad, that’s because it is; the AFL overhauled the system in 2012 after a more concrete formula led to concerns that clubs might bank for extra reward in the draft.

Watch every AFL blockbuster game this weekend live and ad-free on Kayo. New to Kayo? Try free for 14 days >

NEW FOX FOOTY PODCAST — Demons struggling on AND off the pitch

Listen below or subscribe Apple podcast Where Spotify

THE PROGRESS OF ROOS

The new system relies on both the executive and the league committee once a priority pick request is submitted.

North Melbourne won’t officially table a priority pick offer until (if at all) after the season; accommodating one earlier would be tantamount to canceling the rest of the year.

It’s a message the club simply cannot afford, even though those outside have already done so and even though at least fleeting conversations have taken place involving some of Arden Street’s top brass.

From the AFL’s perspective, weighing a request for priority selection from the Kangaroos is well and truly far down its list of agenda items.

If and when this request is filed, however, precedent will be king in the decision-making process.

In a statement to foxfooty.com.au on the possibility of requesting a priority pick, North Melbourne CEO Ben Amarfio said: “Like the salary cap and the draft, priority picks have been used as a tool of effective equalizer by the AFL, so I understand the interest for us to apply for them, especially given the history of picks awarded to several other clubs in similar or better positions than us currently.

“However, we remain positive and are not giving up the prospect of a few wins.

“I know the players and coaches are working hard and we’re looking forward to getting some players back and seeing the development of our talented youngsters in defence.”

PREVIOUS IS KING

The key line may well refer to “several other clubs in similar or better positions than us currently”, suggesting that the precedent is indeed there for North Melbourne.

Looking at the math, it’s not hard to see how a strong case could be presented.

Ahead of Round 13 and then a well-deserved goodbye, North Melbourne’s win-loss record over the past two-and-a-half seasons is eight wins, one draw and 41 losses.

The team percentage is 52.34, which since 1969 is the fourth worst after 12 rounds.

He also holds the lowest ‘points for’ average ever at this stage of the season, at 55.9.

Those are staggering numbers and they are worse placed than the Gold Coast Suns – the last team to be given priority picks.

At the time, in 2019, it was dubbed an “assist package” and came after the Suns won seven games in two seasons and went nine seasons without a Finals appearance (North’s last Finals appearance). Melbourne took place in 2016).

It consisted of the first pick of the 2019 draft (the Suns took Matt Rowell with that pick and Noah Anderson with the No. 2 pick), the first second-round pick, a first-round pick midway through the 2020 draft and the first pick in the second round of the 2021 draft.

It also included Academy roster and zoning benefits, capping an extraordinary suite of concessions.

North Melbourne, clearly, will not be granted such a package, given the Suns’ infancy and the huge investment the AFL has in the team to gain a foothold in a lucrative market that is not yet. fully capitalized.

Rowell and Anderson went to the Suns with the top two picks of the 2019 National Draft (AAP Image/Scott Barbour).Source: AAP

BEST CASE FOR A CHOICE

A more comparable situation might be the Brisbane Lions in 2016, who received the No. 19 pick after seven wins in the previous two seasons and seven seasons without a final.

North Melbourne manager David Noble will be acutely aware of the benefits a priority pick can create, given he was appointed as Lions boss of football towards the end of that year.

The Lions traded the No. 19 pick less than two weeks after receiving him, using him with defender Pearce Hanley to secure the No. 22 pick from the Gold Coast Suns and a future first-round selection from Port Adelaide.

The No.22 pick was used on Cedric Cox, who managed just 13 AFL games, but this Port Adelaide pick (No.12 pick) was used to secure Adelaide’s Charlie Cameron.

Noble has publicly stated in 2021 that he will be open to Roos looking for a priority pick and it’s easy to see why, given how this has helped improve the Lions roster management strategy during his stay there.

Lions great Jonathan Brown, who retired two years before the team got the pick, sees the similarities between his former club and the Roos.

“They were in a bit of a conflict and obviously you have the other factor for the AFL, you’re in a border area and you’re trying to develop the game, so it’s important that your teams up there are competitive,” he said. he told foxfooty.com.au.

“North, however, is likely in a similar situation where he may not be relevant. I think it’s more than justified, a priority choice.

Some would say the team below them might have a case for a priority pick given the Eagles’ annus horribilis, but a team that made the final two years ago and won a flag ago four years simply cannot be considered for such a concession – not yet at least.

Kevin Sheedy “Opening old wounds!” | 00:42

EVALUATE MADE LIST CALLS

Those who would dispute North Melbourne’s credentials for a priority pick would likely argue that this team voluntarily emptied its roster at the end of 2020, parting ways with an unprecedented 14 players before nine more players remained at the end of last season. .

Yet the club would say they could not have predicted a cancer diagnosis for their best player in Ben Cunnington, any more than they could have predicted a bout of glandular fever which sidelined their choice. #3 of 2020 to Will Phillips.

They have tried to solve the short-term problems via the acquisition of Hugh Greenwood and mid-season signing Kallan Dawson could well make his AFL debut in the near future as the team try to strengthen their defense in the absence of Robbie Tarrant. .

While the roster isn’t in great shape based on the form on display, it would take a bold pundit to claim the Roos dumped it – the team’s inability to land a proper star at the table. trading has become something of a running joke for football fans, but the mouth-watering numbers offered to players like Josh Kelly and Dustin Martin are proof that the club have at least tried to dig themselves out of the hole they have gradually fallen into.

It will be difficult to argue, however, that North Melbourne is blameless for the predicament it finds itself in.

Former North Melbourne and St Kilda star Nick Dal Santo was one of many veterans the club parted ways with in 2016 as they sought to transition their roster.

However, the decisions taken since then have not been satisfactory.

“Six years ago they made the right decision, I think, to get rid of me and all those older guys to start over,” Dal Santo told foxfooty.com.au, “but since then the proof before us is that they have made bad decisions since then.

“I thought it was the right decision and it was unfortunate to have been part of it, but since then there have been many bad calls for whatever reason.”

THE AFL’S GREAT ENIGMA

So the question for the AFL is whether these bad decisions amount to a “you’ve made your bed, now you’re lying in it” response, or a more encouraging response that would at least involve a concession.

“My general principle is that competition wants all teams to be competitive, it’s a much better game,” Brown said.

“I understand clubs make mistakes… but does that mean you’re doing too badly and letting them continue to be an underperforming team?

“We want all the teams to be competitive because we look at the top teams, it can be the difference between getting a higher place in the standings when some of the top teams play North Melbourne twice versus once.

“It changes the dynamic of the top eight.”

AFL Footy Fight Night: Full Presser | 11:11

STATE LEAGUE CONCESSIONS

Another tool up the AFL’s sleeve is state league concessions, though these have had mixed results; take Carlton and Gold Coast in 2018.

Both teams at the end of this season did not get priority picks despite asking.

At this point, the Blues had won only seven or fewer games for five straight seasons, while the Suns had endured four straight seasons of six or fewer wins.

Instead, both clubs were given the option of pre-selecting state league players (two for the Blues and three for the Suns), while the Suns were able to increase the size of their rookie roster.

That access, however, could still be used at the trade table, with the Blues for example trading their ‘access’ to pre-registered State League player Shane McAdam to Adelaide in a complex three-way trade involving Sydney for Mitch. McGovern.

Along with his other state league concession, the Blues secured the No. 43 pick by ‘trade’ Nathan Kreuger to Geelong.

No decision has so far reaped significant rewards, but the Suns have proven that a diamond in the rough can mean the world of difference, with one of their state league picks being Sam Collins, who quickly became a cloth player at the club.

The other two selections – Chris Burgess and Josh Corbett – have not had the same impact, underlining why ‘pure’ picks would indeed be the preference of a beleaguered club like North Melbourne at the moment.

For Brown, a pick like No. 19 in this year’s draft would be one he’s comfortable accepting.

Perhaps fans of 17 other clubs may have to accept the same appeal.

Major United States Metropolitan Areas in Transition, According to Census Analysis

0

William H. Frey provides an overview of growth, diversity, segregation, and aging trends in the nation’s largest metropolitan areas, as shown by the 2020 census.

As Frey noted, the nation’s largest metropolitan areas — with 1 million or more residents — are home to six out of ten Americans, and that total is only growing as larger metropolitan areas have grown faster than smaller ones. metropolitan regions from 2010 to 2020.

“Additionally, the increased racial and ethnic diversity that characterizes the nation is particularly concentrated in large metropolitan areas and, in particular, among their youthful populations,” Frey writes.

Some other key findings from the article (which synthesizes the information presented in a report published by Brookings Mountain West), with more details provided in the source article below:

  • Major metropolitan areas have grown more slowly since 2010 than in previous decades.
  • The fastest growing metropolitan areas are in the Sun Belt
  • Cities grew faster and suburbs slower compared to the previous decade of the 2000s.
  • All major metropolitan areas have become more racially and ethnically diverse
  • Neighborhood segregation varied by metropolitan area
  • The youth population has shrunk and become more diverse

“This analysis of the 2020 census clearly shows that the period 2010-2020 represents a decade of transition for major metropolitan areas across the country,” according to Frey. This transition “does not lead to a direct forecast on [metro areas’] future prospects.”

RBA interest rate hike: suburbs to suffer as cash rate rises to 0.85%

0

As the RBA raises the cash rate again, worrying maps have revealed mortgage-stressed suburbs that will be crushed by the rising shock.

The number of Australians suffering from ‘mortgage stress’ is set to soar following today’s interest rate hike, with home loan repayments set to rise again for the second time in as many months.

The Reserve Bank announced this afternoon that the spot rate would rise from 0.35% to 0.85%, an increase of 50 basis points larger than expected.

Particularly affected will be those who entered the market between November 2020 and May this year, during which time the Reserve Bank of Australia (RBA) held rate at a record low of 0.1%.

“Mortgage stress is defined as having less than 5% of ordinary income left over after covering your repayments and ordinary day-to-day expenses,” Kate Colvin, spokeswoman for the advocacy group, told news.com.au housing Everybody’s Home.

“The NSW region and outside of western Sydney will be particularly hard hit by these increases – particularly the low-income communities that stretch across the hinterland and along the NSW coast.”

According to Everybody’s Home’s interactive financial stress map, New South Wales is the most indebted state, with 70% of homes in western Sydney, Hume, Macarthur and Werriwa electorates already facing to financial stress.

Well over 50% of homeowners further inland in the regional seats of Calare, New England and Riverina are also feeling the sting of rising mortgage repayments.

However, NSW is just the tip of the iceberg, with Digital Finance Analytics director Martin North explaining The telegraph of the day that if rates were to rise above 2% (as reported by the RBA), almost 50% of homeowners nationwide would fall into mortgage stress.

“We have over four million homes out of nearly 10 million that are already close to the edge – this is an unprecedented situation,” Mr North said.

“If we assume the RBA adds 2%, or thereabouts, another 400,000 to 500,000 would likely fall into that stress category.”

Mr North said that according to DFA data, Sydney’s south-west suburb of Campbelltown was under the greatest pressure nationally, with almost five in six households under stress.

Tapping in Perth came second in numbers, with Berwick in Melbourne and Toowoomba in Queensland also topping the list.

Affluent suburbs are also feeling the sting

Higher-income areas on the east coast are also expected to feel the bite of the RBA today, with the affluent seats of Wentworth in Sydney’s east and gentrifying Melbourne also facing pre-existing levels of mortgage stress above 40%.

“Stress is also surprisingly high in these affluent suburbs, reflecting the fact that to buy property in Sydney or Melbourne now people have to stretch a lot,” Ms Colvin said.

“This trend makes people very vulnerable to these interest rate hikes and means these developments are going to cause a lot of pain in many communities.”

Ms Colvin said that in general, owners of variable rate mortgages should prepare for the impact.

“People who have brought in more recently have paid a lower interest rate for the term of their mortgage, so this will be a big step forward,” she said.

“These numbers show that people will have to cut spending because their budgets will be really stretched – and that will ripple through the economy.”

Ms Colvin warned that these economic impacts would squeeze budgets more than just less takeaways and overseas holidays.

“People end up delaying expenses that aren’t immediate but are still critically important — for example, dental visits, paying for a car service or car insurance — keeping those expenses remotely can then create more costs later,” she said.

“For wealthy families, this could mean fewer haircuts or nights out – but even that impacts flows with less revenue for companies to employ workers.”

Ms Colvin noted that the community’s vulnerability to interest rates was a preventable problem that had been dismissed for decades, but praised the incumbent government for its national housing strategy.

“The reason we have unstable housing markets is because we don’t have good policy, which is why we need the government to come up with a national housing strategy – which they have pledged to do. “, she said.

“Many political reforms are needed in Australia to bring this situation under control.

“Providing more housing security is certainly possible for people, but it will take time and effort.

Elon Musk predicts ‘population collapse’ in China

0

Tesla CEO Elon Musk suggests that China could soon face a ‘population collapse’ following Beijing’s population control program which until recently had limited most families in One-offspring China.

“Most people still think China has a one-child policy,” he said. wrote in a June 6 tweet pinned to the top of his Twitter account.

“China had its lowest birth date on record last year, despite a three-child policy! At the current birth rate, China will lose about 40% of its population in each generation!” he writes, before adding the sinister note: “Collapse of the population”.

The one-child policy was instituted by the Chinese Communist Party between 1980 and 2015 with the aim of curbing a population growth rate deemed too rapid by the regime and facilitating economic growth. Borderline violators were fined, forced to undergo abortions or sterilizations, and could potentially lose their jobs.

Until its official abolition in 2016, the policy had caused some 400 million abortions, representing about 28% of the country’s 1.4 billion people, according to official statistics. It has also led to child abandonment and infanticide of baby girls due to traditional social preferences for a son.

This decades-long policy has precipitated a demographic crisis in China, marked by a rapidly aging population and falling birth rates. Faced with a looming economic crisis due to its shrinking workforce, the Chinese regime allowed two children for couples in 2016, then increased the limit to three in 2021, along with child care benefits. children, income tax and housing to support growing families.

Children play on a playground inside a shopping complex in Shanghai on June 1, 2021. (Aly Song/Reuters)

But these measures have done little to convince couples to have more children.

China’s birth rate has been falling for five consecutive years. In 2021, about 7.52 babies were born per 1,000 people, the lowest level since the regime took control of China in 1949. In contrast, the birth rate in the United States in 2021 was 12 per 1000 people.

In Guangxi Province, an autonomous region in southern China neighboring Vietnam, authorities in March began allowing married couples to have a fourth child in eight border counties.

But the latest official data from May shows that the population of at least 15 Chinese provinces or municipalities, including Beijing, has shrunk, with 11 provinces seeing declines. This included five provinces where the number of deaths exceeded births for the first time in decades.

Recent population studies indicate that the world as a whole, which currently has around 8 billion people, is facing a problem of population decline.

One, published in the medical journal Lancet, predicts that the world’s human population will peak at 9.7 billion in about four decades before it begins to decline.

“Once global population decline begins, it will likely continue inexorably,” the authors wrote in a study published in 2020.

The Lancet study predicts that by the end of this century, China will have lost 668 million people, nearly half of its current population.

Musk spoke about the consequences of declining global population growth.

CHINA-TECHNOLOGY-AI-CONFERENCE
Elon Musk (right), co-founder and CEO of Tesla, and Jack Ma, co-chair of the United Nations High Level Panel on Digital Cooperation, speak on stage during the World Artificial Intelligence Conference (WAIC) in Shanghai on August 29. 2019. (Hector Retamal/AFP via Getty Images)

He recently shared a clip taken at the World Conference on Artificial Intelligence in 2019, where Musk was seen sitting side-by-side with billionaire Jack Ma, founder of Chinese e-commerce giant Alibaba.

“Assuming there is a benevolent future with AI, I think the biggest problem the world will face in 20 years is population collapse,” he said. “I want to emphasize this: the biggest problem in 20 years will be the collapse of the population. No explosion. Collapse.”

Ma, in the video, agreed with him. “1.4 billion people in China sounds like a lot, but I think in the next 20 years we’ll see this thing will cause big problems for China,” Ma said. population will accelerate.”

“Population collapse is the greatest threat to civilization,” wrote Musk in a May 24 tweet accompanying the short clip.

Eva Fu

Follow

Eva Fu is a New York-based writer for The Epoch Times who focuses on US-China relations, religious freedom, and human rights. Contact Eva at [email protected]

Best Medical Alert Wristbands of 2022 – Forbes Health

0

Medical alert devices remain popular among seniors who live alone, as they provide a safety net in the event of an emergency. Medical alert bracelets are a particularly user-friendly type of alert device and can be useful for anyone who wants better access to emergency services. One of the most wearable types of medical alert products, medical alert bracelets also provide flexibility of movement while keeping the wearer discreetly connected.

Is it better to wear a medical alert bracelet than a watch?

Customers looking for a wearable medical alert device can consider either a wristband option or a medical alert watch. While medical alert bracelets provide a simple one-button alert system worn on the wrist, medical alert watches typically provide a touchscreen and include much more than just an “SOS” function. Modern alert watch models frequently offer health tracking apps, built-in GPS technology, and a more comprehensive suite of emergency response features. While medical alert wristbands are meant to send alerts, medical alert watches can include many of the functions and features of a smartwatch.

Choosing a watch or bracelet largely depends on individual lifestyle and preferences. Customers looking for a simpler solution might prefer the ease of use and relatively affordable price of a wristband. Customers who want the highest degree of mobility and flexibility may prefer a watch, as watches often do not have to stay within range of a base station. People who struggle with new technology or find digital interfaces difficult might consider a bracelet instead of a watch. Which is better, however, is a matter of preference and depends on an individual’s risk factors and lifestyle.

How much do medical alert bracelets cost?

Like a cell phone, a medical alert bracelet incurs costs in two ways: equipment and service. An equipment cost or fixed price covers hardware, such as the base device, help button wristband, charging equipment, and any other physical accessories. The cost of the monitoring service is often billed as an ongoing fee for the duration of use.

Equipment costs vary widely, as some companies waive these costs entirely to attract customers while others charge up to several hundred dollars for hardware and its installation or “activation”. Service costs most often range between $20 and $40 per month for a basic plan, although add-ons such as automatic drop detection capabilities can increase this subscription cost.

Farmers are encouraged to register for the next agricultural census

0

All agricultural producers are encouraged to be counted in the 2022 Census of Agriculture. The last day to register for this year’s census is June 30.

“Whether you’re a large-scale operation or a small family farm, we want you to have a voice and be counted,” said Kentucky Agriculture Commissioner Dr. Ryan Quarles. “Kentucky is still a predominantly agricultural state, and the Agricultural Census creates opportunities for the agricultural industry. Being counted allows you to have a voice in the future of agriculture and our state.

The Census of Agriculture is a comprehensive count of American farms and ranches and the people who operate them. Taken only once every five years, the census examines land use and ownership, farmer characteristics, production practices, income and expenditure.

The information collected during the census is the main source of uniform and complete agricultural data for each state and county or county equivalent. The data is used by everyone who serves farmers and rural communities – federal, state and local governments, agribusinesses, trade associations and many more.

Quarles said farmers and ranchers can use the data to make informed decisions about the future of their own operations. Businesses and cooperatives use the data to determine where to locate facilities that will serve agricultural producers. Community planners use the information to target needed services to rural residents. Legislators use census data when developing agricultural policies and programs.

Last conducted in 2017, the census showed the market value of Kentucky agricultural products sold was $5.74 billion, up 13.2% from the previous agricultural census in 2012. The market value of livestock and poultry sold in 2017 was $3.2 billion, and the market value of crops sold was $2.54 billion. Net cash farm income in 2017 was $1.58 billion.

Farmers who have never received a census and are new to National Agricultural Statistics Service (NASS) surveys can register here to be counted. You do not need to register if you already receive surveys from NASS.

The information collected during the census is confidential. NASS is required by law to use the information only for statistical purposes. NASS only publishes aggregated data, not individual or farm-specific data.

Bong Go comforts the victims of the Taytay fire

0

SEN. Christopher Lawrence “Bong” Go

SEN. Christopher Lawrence ‘Bong’ Go helped victims of the fires in Taytay, Rizal as he urged those in need of medical help to come to the Malasakit centre.

The senator’s office provided emergency aid to residents of Barangay Dolores in Taytay after a major fire broke out in the village on May 28.

“Let’s help each other and we will overcome this crisis as united Filipino citizens,” Go said in a video call.

His team held the relief activity at the Golden City Indoor Field on June 2.

They provided food parcels, vitamins and shirts to a total of 77 families. They also distributed masks to prevent the spread of Covid-19.

Get the latest news


delivered to your inbox

Sign up for the Manila Times daily newsletters

By registering with an email address, I acknowledge that I have read and accept the terms of use and the privacy policy.

Selected residents received new pairs of shoes and bicycles for their commuting needs.

Tablet computers were also given to children to study better as part of the blended learning approach, while some received basketballs, volleyballs and watches.

Representatives of the Department of Social Welfare and Development provided separate financial assistance as part of the national government’s relief measures for those affected by crisis situations.

Meanwhile, the National Housing Authority has been assessing who is eligible for its housing schemes.

As chairman of the Senate Committee on Health and Demographics, Go pledged to continue to work closely with the government to protect the health and well-being of Filipinos by expanding access to health care. affordable health.

He encouraged the sick and the elderly to go to the nearest Malasakit center where they can easily avail the medical assistance programs offered by the government.

He said the main objective of the Malasakit center is to reduce a patient’s hospital bill to the lowest possible amount by covering various services and expenses.

There are currently 151 centers nationwide, the closest of which are located at Schedule 4 of the Antipolo City Hospital System, Casimiro A. Ynares Sr. Memorial Hospital in Rodriguez, Municipal Hospital of Bagong Cainta and Margarito A. Duavit Memorial Hospital in Binangonan.

Maharashtra to conduct first-ever dolphin population estimate in MMR coastal waters

0

The Maharashtra government will conduct the first-ever dolphin population estimate in the coastal waters of the Mumbai Metropolitan Region (MMR). A recent pilot study in South Mumbai, Backbay, resulted in 27 sightings of Indian Ocean humpback dolphins, prompting the state to conduct a detailed MMR survey.

Sanctioned by the Maharashtra State Mangrove Foundation, a preliminary research exercise was conducted by the Coastal Conservation Foundation (CCF) which determined the population and habitat use of Indian Ocean humpback dolphins in the region of Backbay south of Mumbai.

The study was conducted between Haji Ali Bay and Raj Bhavan and in the Back Bay, between April 14 and May 11 this year. The study confirmed 27 dolphin sightings with the largest pod comprising six individuals, including juveniles and sub-adults.

The project’s lead researcher, Shaunak Mod, along with cetacean ecologist Mahi Mankeshwar and marine enthusiast Pradip Patade used a total of seven boat surveys to observe the dolphins. “This rapid assessment gave us a preliminary idea of ​​the distribution of dolphins in the study area and the different ways they use the habitat,” said Mankeshwar, who previously worked in the Andaman and Nicobar Islands. on marine mammals.

The best of Express Premium
Prime
Tavleen Singh writes: Another Kashmir exodus?Prime
An Express Survey – Part 2 |  Class 5A Subject: MathematicsPrime
Has the sun finally set on the British Empire?  The Queen and the Commonwealth...Prime

Several sightings of Indian Ocean humpback dolphins have been recorded near the coast of Mumbai – Sassoon Pier, Versova and Madh Pier and Bandra Worli Sea Link, among others. These dolphins usually live in shallow coastal waters.

Virendra Tiwari, another senior chief forest conservator, Maharashtra Mangrove Cell, said: “There have been reports of roaming dolphin sightings along the Mumbai coast from Manori, Versova stream areas to Nariman Point. , Marine Drive and towards Alibaug for some time now. . However, no population estimates or analyzes of their habitat use have been done before. The study will start after the monsoon through MMR.

Humpback dolphins are known to travel in groups called pods and it is rare to spot a single dolphin near the coast. Dolphins are an endangered cetacean species, protected under Schedule I of the Wildlife Protection Act 1972. Mumbai’s waters are known to be home to at least two cetaceans – the Indian Ocean humpback dolphin (Sousa plumbea) and the Indo-Pacific finless porpoise (Neophocaena phocaenoides), according to anecdotal sightings and strandings. documented.

Researchers around the world have highlighted how climate change is directly influencing the habitat of Indian Ocean humpback dolphins, leading to changes in navigation and feeding patterns.

Tiwari added: “These dolphins are also biological indicators and their behavior and the environmental conditions in which they survive will also reveal more details about the climate impacts they are exposed to and the interventions we can put in place.

Registration for the 2022 Census of Agriculture closes June 30

0

If you are a producer and want to participate in the 2022 Census of Agriculture, you have until June 30 to register. Taken only once every five years by the USDA’s National Agricultural Statistics Service (NAAS), the census provides a comprehensive count of America’s farms and ranches and the people who operate them.

NASS will mail Agricultural Census survey codes to registered growers in November, so they can respond securely online. In addition, a hard copy of the survey will be sent out in December.

The Census of Agriculture has been conducted for over 180 years and serves as complete and unbiased agricultural data for the nation. All operations are included, regardless of size or location, provided that at least $1,000 of agricultural products are sold or would generally be sold in a year.

“The Census of Agriculture is a collective voice that tells the story and value of American agriculture,” said Barbara Rater, director of the Census and Surveys Division at NASS. “Data influences action and informs policy and program decisions that directly impact producers, their operations, and everyone they touch – and that’s all of us.”

Producers can find frequently asked questions, explore past and current agricultural census data, learn about agricultural census special studies, and access other agricultural tools on the NASS website at nass.usda.gov/AgCensus.

Sega unveils Mega Drive Mini 2, and it will include 50 Mega Drive games and Mega CDs

0

Sega has unveiled Mega Drive Mini 2, its latest retro mini console.

Last week, Sega hinted that it had a big “new project” to share with us this week, teasing that the show will apparently include guest appearances from Hiroyuki Miyazaki and Yosuke Okunari. Given the guests, it wasn’t a stretch to assume the secret new project might have something to do with a new retro Sega console – and it turns out that’s exactly what Sega was teasing.

As of now, we don’t have any information on English social media, but the reveal has been posted on Sega Japan’s official YouTube channel, which you can check out below:


The Mega Drive Mini 2 will include 50 Mega Drive and Mega CD titles, including Sonic CD, Virtua Racing and Fantasy Zone (thanks, NintendoLife). Other games confirmed so far include:

  • Bonanza Bros.
  • Fantasy area
  • magic tarur to kun
  • Mansion of Hidden Souls
  • Popful Mail
  • Brilliant Force CD
  • shine in the darkness
  • Silpheed
  • sonic cd
  • Thunder Force IV
  • Virtual race

Although there is no confirmation yet that the mini system will come to fans outside of Japan, Sega has confirmed that Mega Drive Mini 2 will be released to Japanese fans on October 27 and will cost ¥9,980, or around £60.

John from Digital Foundry was a huge fan of the original Mega Drive Mini.

“There’s so much to love about this product, from the brilliant recreation of the machine itself, to the excellent emulation and a simply stellar range of games,” he wrote. “Audio delay, input lag and scaling quirks prevent this from achieving absolute perfection – but for the purists there’s always the Analog Mega Sg for absolute authenticity.

“However, for a product aimed at recapturing the magic of a very special era of console gaming, it’s just superb. If you grew up on Sega’s 16-bit machine but haven’t played it since a while, it’s a must-have release – and possibly the best retro mini console yet.”

VA officials lag behind goal of housing 38,000 distressed vets this year

0

Veterans Affairs officials are behind schedule on their goal of placing 38,000 veterans in permanent housing this year, and the coronavirus is once again to blame.

In remarks to the annual conference of the National Coalition for Homeless Veterans on Friday, VA Secretary Denis McDonough said the department remains committed to the goal, first announced earlier this year. as a way to reinvigorate outreach efforts for homeless veterans after the national pandemic.

“We should be a third of that target now, but I think we’re at around 29 per cent,” he said. “So we are late. I was worried about this as we knew from the start that we might fall behind as January was a tough month with the Omicron [variant of Covid-19].”

Covid-19 cases rose across America in the first few months of 2022. Veterans Affairs officials have seen daily active cases in the medical system drop from around 10,000 in mid-December to nearly 78,000 in mid-January.

Housing advocates at this week’s conference noted that two years of pandemic restrictions have had a significant impact on their operations, but many hope that significant gains can be made to help homeless veterans as these challenges are fading.

And McDonough said he was also optimistic, though he noted that reaching more veterans will take the dedication of his department and community partners.

“By putting 38,000 veterans into permanent housing, we’re not just going to try to do that,” he told a crowd of several hundred defenders. “We’re not going to set process goals to help us get there. With your help, this year we will…

“We cannot prevent veteran homelessness in this precarious economy without you, because this fight against veteran homelessness takes us all across the country.

McDonough said his remarks on the economy referenced inflation and rising housing costs, two other challenges conference attendees have been discussing in recent days.

In 2020 — the last year a full count was made by federal officials — the estimated number of homeless veterans was around 37,200, down about 6% from the previous year.

Authorities have seen a 10% drop in the number of veterans using emergency shelter services from 2020 to 2021, but it is unclear to what extent this is due to their improved housing situation or to concerns about the use of public facilities amid coronavirus outbreaks.

McDonough said not all veterans hoping to help this year are currently without stable housing.

In some cases, people currently living in transitional settlements will benefit from the moves. In other cases, advocates will provide assistance to people before they become homeless.

“We have pretty good data to know who is at risk of becoming homeless and can reach them,” McDonough said.

McDonough added that he expects an update from senior executives on progress toward the 38,000 people goal in the coming weeks.

Leo covers Congress, Veterans Affairs and the White House for Military Times. He has covered Washington, DC since 2004, focusing on military personnel and veterans policies. His work has earned him numerous accolades, including a 2009 Polk Award, a 2010 National Headliner Award, the IAVA Leadership in Journalism Award, and the VFW News Media Award.

Total number of displaced people in Myanmar tops 1 million, says UN – The Diplomat

0

Beat ASEAN | Company | South East Asia

According to the UN humanitarian agency, 694,000 people have been displaced by the conflict since last year’s coup.

Displaced people from Myanmar help each other to transport donated items across the Moei River from the Thai side to Myanmar, in Mae Sot, Thailand on February 7, 2022.

Credit: AP Photo

The number of displaced people in Myanmar has topped one million for the first time as conflicts stemming from last year’s military coup continue to widen and deepen, the agency said yesterday. United Nations humanitarian relief.

According to the latest humanitarian update from the United Nations Office for the Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs (OCHA), some 694,000 people have been displaced by the conflict and insecurity resulting from the disastrous army takeover last February. . This represents an increase of 127,900 since OCHA’s previous update in mid-April.

The report, which covers the period up to May 26, says that of this group of 694,000 people, thousands were forced to move for the second or third time, while around 40,200 people crossed the borders to neighboring countries. An additional 346,000 people are estimated to have been displaced by fighting before last year’s coup, mostly due to long-running conflicts between the military and ethnic armed groups that have been fighting for their autonomy for decades. vis-à-vis the central state.

OCHA also estimates that 12,700 properties, “including homes, churches, monasteries and schools”, have been destroyed since the coup, compared to 8,262 in the latest update.

The military takeover last year ended a decade of limited openness, provoking a fierce response from Myanmar’s people and stoking simmering conflicts with armed ethnic groups on the country’s periphery. After security forces violently suppressed mass protests, opposition reemerged in the form of dozens of locally-based People’s Defense Forces (PDF) that launched a collective armed uprising against the coup government.

Like this article ? Click here to register for full access. Just $5 a month.

According to the update, the already dire situation has been exacerbated by an escalation in fighting between the junta and its opponents. “Various regions of Myanmar have witnessed an escalation in fighting, further worsening the already fragile humanitarian situation,” the update said. “The impact on civilians is worsening every day with frequent indiscriminate attacks and incidents involving explosive hazards including landmines and explosive remnants of war.”

The effects of the conflict are compounded by rising commodity prices, including food and fuel, and the onset of the monsoon season, “causing damage to shelters and further exacerbating existing vulnerabilities”.

OCHA added that funding for UN relief efforts is “catastrophic” and that funding for the 2022 humanitarian response plan is only 10% funded, with a shortfall of $740 million. “All clusters are severely underfunded, threatening their ability to meet growing needs and response gaps,” the report said.

OCHA’s humanitarian updates are rarely fun to read, but the latest report paints a particularly grim picture of Myanmar’s trajectory, more than 16 months after the coup. With the clashes between the military junta and its loose coalition of opponents, and no negotiated resolution to the crisis likely in the foreseeable future, it’s likely that the next update, due later this month, will carry the same bad – or even worse – news.

ASCENT AEROSYSTEMS’ SPIRIT PLATFORM JOINS BLUE UAS DIU APPROVED LIST

0

“We’ve been shipping spirits since 2020, and our customers around the world have come to appreciate the robust versatility it offers,” said Paul Fermo, Vice President of Business Development. “We are delighted that government and municipal customers can now get the systems they need with just a few mouse clicks.”

The DIU Blue UAS program was created to provide a comprehensive verification process for certain unmanned aerial systems. By eliminating duplicate approval processes across various branches of government and defense agencies, operators and manufacturers can quickly get systems into the field where they are needed.

“Government agencies cannot choose when and where they fly,” said Peter Fuchs, CEO. “The coaxial configuration of the Spirit provides the compact, high-performance, all-weather capability needed for these critical applications. Its modular design allows operators to not only configure it exactly as needed for the mission at hand, but also easily adapt new sensors as they become available.”

The company currently has spirits available for immediate delivery, and delivery positions are being accepted for additional units slated for shipment beginning in August.

About Ascent AeroSystems

Ascent AeroSystems’ compact, all-weather, high-performance unmanned aerial systems are designed and built in the UNITED STATES. Based on patented coaxial technology, they offer unparalleled versatility and are the ideal platforms for mission-critical operations and system integrators in public safety, industrial, government and enterprise applications.

For more information:

SOURCEAscent AeroSystems

People in North Macedonia are poorly educated, according to census data

0


People in a cafe in Skopje, North Macedonia, April 28, 2021. Photo EPA-EFE/GEORGI LICOVSKI

More than 508,000 people in North Macedonia, more than a quarter of the population of 1.8 million, have had no formal education or started but did not complete high school, according to data on education and literacy census conducted last year.

Data recently released by the Office for National Statistics shows that over 23,000 people, or 1.5% of the population, have no formal education and over 62,000, or 4.1%, have no finished primary school.

A more worrying figure of 423,000 people have only completed primary school.

The head of the Statistics Office, Apostol Simovski, said the gap between education levels in urban and rural areas could explain the figure.

“We in [the capital] Skopje only sees a narrow picture, but if we look further, and I’m talking about rural areas, we will see many mature groups of people there who don’t have much education but are alive and well,” said Simovski.

He added that some of that number are still in school.

“The data refer to people over 15 years old. So there are many who have not finished high school but are in the process of doing so. [of doing so]. This should be taken into account,” Simovski said.

Recently published data reveals that about 19,000 people, or 1.2%, are illiterate. More than 13,000 of them are women.

With regard to higher education, the data shows that only 17% of the resident population has completed a university or university education.

Simovski said that number may actually be higher, but many of the more educated citizens have left the country and are therefore not represented in the data.

“We are producing graduates but that number is only [relevant] for the resident population. The vast majority of young people intend to leave. That’s why the percentage of highly educated people is so low,” he said.

Other data supports this claim, revealing a severe shortage of highly skilled professionals and scientists. Some 698 positions in these fields are vacant, no doubt a high number for such a small country.

After numerous delays over the past two decades, the country finally conducted a census in September last year and released the first data in March.

Since then, the State Statistical Office periodically releases batches of data on different areas of interest.

NAHB urges lawmakers to implement policy to improve housing affordability

0

As the National Association of Home Builders celebrates National Homeownership Month in June, builders are urging lawmakers to implement policies that will help improve housing affordability, calling for resolution on supply chain disruptions and the end of Canadian timber tariffs.

Prices for building materials are up 19.2% year-on-year and 35.6% since the start of the pandemic, according to the latest Producer Price Index report released by the Bureau of Labor Statistics. Additionally, tariffs on Canadian lumber shipments to the U.S. and production bottlenecks have fueled lumber price volatility, which has added more than $18,600 to the price of a new home since last August.

“The supply chain crisis and lumber prices in the housing industry are putting the American dream of homeownership out of reach for families,” said NAHB President Jerry Konter. “Home builders need access to reasonably priced lumber to build a home the average working family can afford.”

In April, more than 10,000 NAHB members from all 50 states, the District of Columbia and Puerto Rico sent a letter to President Biden calling on the White House to take immediate action to address the growing affordability crisis. housing.

The following month, the Biden administration released a “housing supply action plan” to alleviate high housing costs by increasing the supply of quality housing across the country over the next five years. Homebuilders say the plan doesn’t go far enough to address the industry’s many underlying challenges, including rising costs for lumber and other building materials and the broader supply chain crisis. ‘supply.

“Ending tariffs on Canadian lumber shipments will allow builders to build more affordable entry-level housing, provide quality rental housing and strengthen the national economy,” Konter said.

New home sales posted a double-digit percentage decline in April, falling to their weakest pace in two years, as rising mortgage interest rates and deteriorating affordability conditions continue to weigh on the housing market.

Health vs. Public Opinion: How to Navigate and Respond to the Hesitant Population – The European Sting – Critical News & Insights on European Politics, Economy, Foreign Affairs, Business & Technology

0
(Credit: Unsplash)

This article was written exclusively for The European Sting by Mr. Martin Duranik, 3rd year medical student at Pavol Jozef Safarik University, currently VPE SloMSA Slovakia. It is affiliated with the International Federation of Medical Students’ Associations (IFMSA), a cordial partner of The Sting. The opinions expressed in this article belong strictly to the authors and do not necessarily reflect the views of IFMSA on the subject, nor that of The European Sting.


Covid-19 has hit the world by surprise, exploiting every preparedness gap and self-proclaimed invincibility in the face of such threats. There is no doubt that the world was profoundly changed by this terrifying experience. And it’s not just the aspect of physical health – a profound shift has taken place in the perspective of health care. We have gone from a doctor-patient relationship to public debate.

First, we need to rethink this approach. The doctor-patient relationship has been defined as “a consensual relationship in which the patient knowingly seeks the assistance of the physician and in which the physician knowingly accepts the person as a patient”. (1) But why insist so much? While public debate may be the most valuable and valued interaction in free society, it is not tailored to meet an individual’s needs within an underlying global health context. Large amounts of accessible data, especially on the Internet, can confuse even experts, let alone the general population. It is the quita essentia of hesitation itself. It is possible to avoid misunderstanding the authority of an expert in his field for individuals seeking recognition by moving the conversation from the public space to the doctor’s office.

However, to be trustworthy, we should devote some of our energy to trying to create comprehensive guidelines for physicians themselves. Any doubt from an expert is projected negatively onto a patient and undermines trust between the two. During the pandemic, even if they were created, they provided ample space for potential confusion and uncertainty – leaving physicians alone to decide on a highly socially discussed issue. The older generation of healthcare professionals, more rigid in an online environment, providing patient care in predominantly rural areas, is particularly vulnerable. (2) These areas are vital for successful vaccination coverage, because if in urban areas the vaccination rate exceeds 75%, in rural areas it does not exceed 59%. (3)

In addition, resources dedicated to immunization awareness should be targeted to a hesitant audience, not the denier. A Slovak survey revealed that only 20% of respondents are explicitly against vaccination, while almost 50% are hesitant. (4) The current attempt to persuade the antivax community seems long, costly, and therefore ineffective. Worse still, the already often wary government’s sense of urgency and pressure is diverted to support the anti campaign.

In conclusion, our goal for successfully overcoming vaccine hesitancy should be to effectively target the right demographic group, accept the proposal made by the opposition to the vaccine, and prevent the government from interfering in public vaccination campaigns. Instead, it should lay out exact guidelines for doctors to follow, strengthening the doctor-patient relationship and, ultimately, stabilizing the ongoing divide in our society. IGOs and NGOs must continue their work of sensitizing the population. This can lead to the government and other organizations being seen as one, which does not overwhelm them with other health-related discussions. If done correctly, we could achieve the same universal acceptance of vaccines as we had before the antivax covid campaign.

References:

1. QT, Inc v. Mayo Clinic Jacksonville, 2006 US Dist. LEXIS 33668, at *10 (ND III May 15, 2006)

2. Palmer, John. “As rural records age, will there be enough left?” Patient Safety and Quality Health CareSeptember 6, 2019, https://www.psqh.com/analysis/as-rural-docs-age-will-there-be-enough-left/.

3. Saelee R, Zell E, Murthy BP, et al. Disparities in COVID-19 Vaccination Coverage Between Urban and Rural Counties — United States, December 14, 2020–January 31, 2022. MMWR Morb Mortal Wkly Rep 2022;71:335–340. DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.15585/mmwr.mm7109a2external icon

4. IPSOS sr o: „TLAČOVÁ SPRÁVA: NA SLOVENSKU BY SA DALA PROTI VÍRUSU COVID-19 URČITE ZAOČKOVAŤ MENEJ NEŽ TRETINA POPULÁCIE, TÝCH, KTORÍ VAKCÍNU ZÁSADNE ODMIETAJÚ JE ALE EŠTE MENEJ. V KRAJINÁCH, KDE SA UŽ OČKOVALO OCHOTA STÚPLA.“ 11. 1. 2021. https://www.ipsos.com/sites/default/files/ct/news/documents/2021-01/ipsos_prieskum_ockovanie_proti_covid-19_tlacova_sprava_11._1._2021 .pdf

About the Author

Martin Duranik is a 3rd year medical student at Pavol Jozef Safarik University, currently VPE SloMSA Slovakia. Having started in the local activities of SCOME, later engaging in the process of student assessment and accreditation, he is also a member of the Slovak Student Council for Higher Education. He participated in the preparation of a statement by the SSSF (IPSF) for the European Commission on the low use of COVID-19 vaccines. His hobbies are philosophy, in-depth discussions of the coffee industry, and karaoke nights.

High school student in custody following threats at school

0

A 12-year-old college student at Superior is facing a felony charge of making terroristic threats after showing a classmate a list of other children he hoped to harm. The threat is the latest in a series of incidents in Wisconsin following the shooting that killed two teachers and 19 students in Uvalde, Texas a week ago.

The upper middle school student is in custody after school staff were tipped this morning through the state Express yourself, express yourself reporting system, according to the Higher Police Department.

School staff immediately isolated the student, and senior police dispatched officers to the college.

“The senior police department also dispatched two detectives to immediately begin an investigation into the threats. The investigation determined that the student showed another student a list of other students’ SMS names and told this student that he intended to harm these listed students,” police said in a news release. “The student who made this threat admitted that he did so in order to scare the student he was showing the list to.”

The senior college student also faces a disorderly conduct charge, which is a misdemeanor. The 12-year-old is waiting to be referred to Douglas County Health and Social Services.

Teenagers and children have often been arrested for making threats following mass shootings across the country. Even statements made in jest often lead to felony charges of terrorism threat amid heightened fears of school shootings.

Slinger schools were closed on Friday after a student said he had a gun in a middle school hallway. Law enforcement searched the school about 30 miles northwest of Milwaukee and found no weapons.

The Upper School District just adopted the Speak Up, Speak Out reporting system earlier this year, which was first launched by the Wisconsin Department of Justice in 2020. The system provides a one-stop shop for reporting in full confidentiality threats 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. a week. Tips reported through the platform are sent back to schools and possibly law enforcement, depending on the details of what is shared.

In its first year, the DOJ reported more than 200 schools received at least one tip through the platform, and the reporting system received nearly 1,600 contacts.

BJP and RSS petrified by demand for caste-based census for fear of losing political currency

0

In what is being described as a masterstroke, Nitish nominated Jharkhand State Chairman JD(U) and former MLA Khiru Mahto as the party’s candidate in the Rajya Sabha elections, which also sent waves of BJP shock. No BJP leader worth his salt expected Nitish to go against Modi’s wishes. As he drove the chasm between Nitish and Modi, he also sent a message that Nitish was exploring the possibility of getting closer to opposition parties in the state.

It may be recalled that in 2021, Nitish had insisted on four ministerial places – two Cabinet Ministers and two Ministers of State – for his party, but ultimately only accepted one place for the JD(U) in the Modi office.

This was obviously seen by Nitish as a move to reduce his political stature by Modi, although at the time he did not challenge the prime minister. Now, with Rajya Sabha’s biennial polls looming, it looks like he has decided to assert himself and challenge Modi.

In a significant development, Lalu Yadav has decided to support Nitish Kumar and has called a multi-party meeting on June 1 in which Bihar CM will be a key figure. Lately, opposition parties have taken steps to come together to challenge the BJP, with the latest such occasion being an event organized by Rashtriya Lok Dal, led by Jayant Chaudhary, at Delhi’s Vigyan Bhawan to commemorate the 35th anniversary of the death of the former Prime Minister and the farmers. Chief Charan Singh.

At the initiative of Nitish and Lalu Yadav, opposition parties across the country had already decided to pressure the Modi government to carry out a national caste census. The RLD-led meeting also passed a resolution, stating, “The last caste census in India was carried out in 1931 and all government policies are formulated based on the numbers listed at the time. Therefore, it is imperative for us to immediately implement a caste census to inform data-driven decision-making, as is happening in almost every sphere of our lives, whether in medicine, science or business.

Significantly, the RLD-sponsored meeting brought together senior leaders from JD(U), Lalu Yadav’s RJD, Trinamool Congress, Aam Aadmi Party, CPI(M), Apna Dal (Kamerawadi) and of TIPRA Motha, based in Tripura.

During the meeting, the opposition parties also demanded the creation of a “Social Justice Commission” or a “Commission for Equal Opportunities” responsible for analyzing data from a census of castes. to ensure adequate representation of women, SC, ST, OBC, minorities or weaker sections based in rural areas.

High Level Indaba for Gwayi-Shangani | The Chronicle

0

The Chronicle

Nqobile Tshili, columnist
A HIGH LEVEL inter-ministerial indaba will be held in Hwange this Friday to assess progress and assess the impact of the construction of the giant Gwayi-Shangani Lake, which is due to be completed next month.

The huge body of water is nearly 70% complete and is expected to permanently solve Bulawayo’s water supply problems and turn the entire Matabeleland region into a green belt.

The project is part of the National Matabeleland Zambezi Water Project (NMZWP), a century-old dream first hinted at in 1912, but only the government of President Mnangagwa is making it a reality.

Construction works at Lake Gwayi-Shangani in the province of Matabeleland North

The government has set the end of next month as the deadline for completion and commissioning should be done before the end of the year. When completed, Lake Gwayi-Shangani will provide Bulawayo residents with 450ml of water per day, three times what the city needs.

A vast expanse of irrigable land covering 10,000 hectares along the Gwayi-Shangani-Bulawayo pipeline has since been identified.

Crews are already on the ground digging and laying the 245 km Gwayi-Shangani-Bulawayo pipeline and around 500 residents are involved in the construction of the dam.

The Minister of Lands, Agriculture, Water, Fisheries and Rural Development, Dr Anxious Masuka, invited the Vice President, Dr Constantino Chiwenga, in his capacity as Minister of Health and Child Protection, Minister of Finance and Economic Development, Professor Mthuli Ncube, Minister of Local Government and Public Works July Moyo, National Minister of Housing and Social Amenities Daniel Garwe and Minister of environment, climate, tourism and hospitality Nqobizitha Ndlovu to attend the inter-ministerial indaba on Friday.

Minister of Lands, Agriculture, Water, Fisheries and Rural Development, Dr Anxious Masuka

He also invited Minister of Energy and Electricity Development, Zhemu Soda, Minister of Primary and Secondary Education, Dr. Evelyn Ndlovu, Minister of Higher and Higher Education, Innovation , Science and Technology Development, Professor Amon Murwira, Minister of Mines and Mining Development, Winston Chitando, Transport and Infrastructure Development. Minister Felix Mhona, Matabeleland North Provincial Affairs and Devolution Minister Richard Moyo and his Bulawayo counterpart Judith Ncube.

Dr. Masuka also invited Bulawayo City Clerk, Mr. Christopher Dube to attend the crucial meeting.

Bulawayo City Clerk, Mr. Christopher Dube

“This meeting will give us the opportunity to get updates on the progress of the holistic elements of the project covering dam construction, power generation, irrigation development, fisheries, Gwayi pipeline- Shangani-Bulawayo, Resettlement and Compensation of Displaced Farmers,” reads Dr Masuka’s invitation. letter dated May 27, 2022 seen by Chronicle.

He said the meeting will conclude with a visit to assess the progress of each of the identified elements of the project.

Matabeleland North Provincial Affairs and Decentralization Minister Moyo, who said he had not yet received the invitation, said the meeting of various government ministers was essential to ensure the bottlenecks of bottlenecks affecting the project are resolved.

“It will be important because when we come together, then we can come up with resolutions that can address all the challenges affecting the construction of the dam,” he said.

Plans are underway to set up a 10 megawatt hydroelectric plant, which will feed into the national grid.

The government has announced that it will build mini-hydropower plants on all dams under construction.

Irrigation projects to be implemented along the pipeline to Bulawayo will boost food production in Matabeleland North, thereby improving national food security.

The dam project is expected to leave a legacy of knowledge transfer and creation of new industries at the dam site. China International Water and Electric Corp, which is building the dam, is expected to transfer its knowledge and skills to locals working on the site.

The company has established a steel pipe workshop at the site and as such no longer imports pipes, saving foreign exchange.

The production of the steel tubes will continue even after the completion of the construction of the dam.

The contractors also established a quarry plant which can again continue to produce the quarry after the dam construction is completed and these material production activities have significantly reduced the dam construction costs. — @nqotshili

Here are the 2021 population estimates for every city and town in Alabama

0

Recent population estimates from the U.S. Census Bureau have shed light on where Alabama is growing or, in many cases, shrinking, as nearly half of cities and towns lost population in the first year of the pandemic.

Cities along the Gulf Coast and in fast-growing areas like metro Huntsville and suburban Birmingham continued to grow from July 1, 2020 through July 1, 2021, according to new federal estimates. The city of Auburn added more people to the total than any other city in the state during this time.

But Alabama itself only added 15,000 people, as many cities and towns shrank. This includes Birmingham, which fell down the list and is now the third largest city in the state. It also includes Montgomery, who, despite losing more than 1,300 people, overtook Birmingham for second place.

A total of 221 of Alabama’s 462 census-designated cities and towns lost at least one person from 2020 to 2021. That’s about 48%, or nearly half of all cities and towns. 38 others remained exactly the same size. This leaves 203 places that have grown, adding at least one person. That’s 44% of towns and villages.

More from the census: These are the fastest growing counties in Alabama from 2020 to 2021

Birmingham falls below Montgomery in 2021 census estimates, now Alabama’s third-largest city

Alabama’s population grew slightly in 2021, despite heavy toll of COVID pandemic

You can see the total population trend for each city and town in Alabama from July 2020 to July 2021 in the list below. The list is in alphabetical order, but you can sort by total population, population change, and percent change by clicking on each heading.

You can also search for a specific town or city in Alabama by typing in the search box.

[Can’t see the list? Click here.]

There is no doubt that much of the population loss during this period is due to deaths from the COVID-19 pandemic, with Alabama having recorded 10,402 COVID deaths during the period from 1 July 2020 to July 1, 2021. In 2020, for the first time in the state’s recorded history, Alabama had more deaths than births — and the trend likely continued into 2021.

Alabama, and many growing counties within it, grew population only through net migration – meaning more people from out of state moved in than people from within. Alabama. Deaths from the pandemic have meant that Alabama has seen a net loss of natural change, but migration has been enough to offset those losses. Data on what exactly is driving population change in Alabama is not available at the city level, but can be seen at the county level here.

Do you have an idea for an Alabama data story? Email Ramsey Archibald at [email protected]and follow him on Twitter @RamseyArchibald. Learn more about Alabama data here.

Chassis Dynamometer System Market – An In-Depth Study by Key Players: MTS, Shin Nippon Tokki, Dynapack, SuperFlow, HORIBA, Meidensha, AVL List, Rototest, MAHA, Mustang Dynamometer, Sierra Instruments, Dyno Dynamics, Hofmann TeSys – ManufactureLink

0

New Jersey, USA, – Mr Accuracy Reports published new research on Global Chassis dynamometer system covering the micro level of analysis by competitors and key business segments (2022-2029). The Global Chassis Dynamometer System explores in-depth study on various segments like opportunity, size, development, innovation, sales and overall growth of key players. The research is carried out on primary and secondary statistical sources and consists of qualitative and quantitative details.

Some of the Major Key Players profiled in the study are MTS, Shin Nippon Tokki, Dynapack, SuperFlow, HORIBA, Meidensha, AVL List, Rototest, MAHA, Mustang Dynamometer, Sierra Instruments, Dyno Dynamics, Hofmann TeSys

Get sample PDF report + all related charts and graphs @: https://www.maccuracyreports.com/report-sample/373807

Various factors are responsible for the growth trajectory of the market, which are studied extensively in the report. Additionally, the report lists down the restraints that threaten the global Chassis Dynamometer System market. This report is a consolidation of primary and secondary research, which provides market size, share, dynamics and forecasts for various segments and sub-segments considering macro and micro environmental factors. It also assesses the bargaining power of suppliers and buyers, the threat of new entrants and product substitutes, and the degree of competition prevailing in the market.

Global Chassis Dynamometer System Market Segmentation:

Chassis Dynamometer System Segmentation by Type:

Single roller type, multi roller type.

Chassis Dynamometer System Segmentation by Application:

Passenger vehicle, Utility vehicle

Key aspects of the market are illuminated in the report:

Summary: It covers summary of the most vital studies, global Chassis Dynamometer System market increase rate, humble circumstances, market trends, drivers and issues along with macro pointers.

Analysis of the study: Covers major companies, vital market segments, the scope of products offered in the global Chassis Dynamometer System Market, years measured, and study points.

Company profile: Each well-defined company in this segment is selected based on products, value, SWOT analysis, capacity and other important characteristics.

Manufacturing by region: This Global Chassis Dynamometer System report offers data on import and export, sales, production, and key companies in all regional markets studied.

Market Segmentation: By Geographical Analysis

The Middle East and Africa (GCC countries and Egypt)
North America (United States, Mexico and Canada)
South America (Brazil, etc)
Europe (Turkey, Germany, Russia UK, Italy, France, etc.)
Asia Pacific (Vietnam, China, Malaysia, Japan, Philippines, Korea, Thailand, India, Indonesia and Australia)

The cost analysis of the Global Chassis Dynamometer Systems Market has been performed while considering manufacturing expense, labor cost, and raw materials along with their market concentration rate, vendors and the price trend. Other factors such as supply chain, downstream buyers, and sourcing strategy have been assessed to provide a comprehensive and in-depth view of the market. Buyers of the report will also be exposed to market positioning study with factors like target customer, brand strategy and pricing strategy taken into consideration.

Key questions answered by the report include:

  • Who are the leading market players in the Chassis Dynamometer System market?
  • What are the major regions for dissimilar trades anticipated to witness astounding growth in the Chassis Dynamometer System market?
  • What are the regional growth trends and major revenue-generating regions for the Chassis Dynamometer System market?
  • What will be the market size and growth rate by the end of the forecast period?
  • What are the key Chassis Dynamometer System market trends impacting the growth of the market?
  • What are the main types of chassis dynamometer system products?
  • What are the main applications of the chassis dynamometer system?
  • Which Chassis Dynamometer System Services technologies will dominate the market in the next 7 years?

Please click here today to purchase the full report @ https://www.maccuracyreports.com/checkout/373807

Contents

Global Chassis Dynamometer System Market Research Report 2022-2029

Chapter 1 Chassis Dynamometer System Market Overview

Chapter 2 Global Economic Impact on Industry

Chapter 3 Global Market Competition by Manufacturers

Chapter 4 Global Production, Revenue (Value) by Region

Chapter 5 Global Supply (Production), Consumption, Export, Import by Regions

Chapter 6 Global Production, Revenue (Value), Price Trend by Type

Chapter 7 Global Market Analysis by Application

Chapter 8 Manufacturing Cost Analysis

Chapter 9 Industrial Chain, Sourcing Strategy and Downstream Buyers

Chapter 10 Marketing Strategy Analysis, Distributors/Traders

Chapter 11 Market Effect Factors Analysis

Chapter 12 – Global Chassis Dynamometer System Market Forecast

If you have any special requirements, please let us know and we will offer you the report you want. you can also get individual chapter wise section or region wise report version like North America, Europe or Asia.

Bihar minister writes to all parties for caste census meeting under CM on June 1

0

PATNA: Bihar Parliamentary Affairs Minister Vijay Kumar Choudhary wrote to leaders of all political parties on Sunday for a scheduled meeting on the issue of caste census in the state under the chairmanship of Chief Minister Nitish Kumar at 4 p.m. June 1st.

The meeting will take place just one day after the deadline for applications for the Rajya Sabha. If there are only five nominations for the five seats, two from Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP) and Rashtriya Janata Dal (RJD) and one from Janata Dal-United (JD-U) will win outright. For the moment, only the two RJD candidates have submitted their applications. The BJP and JD-U have kept it on hold so far, giving way to speculation on their likely moves.

In his letter, Choudhary, who had previously announced the June 1 date for the meeting after speaking to leaders of different political parties, wrote that Chief Minister Nitish Kumar had decided to “convene a multi-party meeting after the Center had expressed its inability to accept the unanimous resolutions of the Bihar Legislative Assembly to hold the census according to caste”.

“The Vidhan Sabha had unanimously passed the resolution to hold a caste census concurrently with the 2021 census. When the Center expressed its inability for this, the CM decided to do so as it stands. The meeting was convened in this regard at the Samvad (secretariat of the CM). Y’all asked to be a part of it,” he wrote.

Choudhary said both resolutions were passed unanimously during his tenure as president and all parties were united on the issue in the state. “The meeting will deliberate on how to proceed. All the leaders of the legislative parties were invited to the meeting, as the resolutions had been passed by the Vidhan Sabha,” he added.

BJP state chairman Dr Sanjay Jaiswal has already announced that his party will participate, while the RJD has voiced its demand for a caste census, with opposition leader Tejaswhi Prasad Yadav even going so far as to threatening to issue a ‘padyatra’ on the issue if the CM did not move forward.

Although the CM has also consistently advocated for caste census as a necessity for better planning based on correct population of different castes, the issue has remained on the back burner due to political constraints and reported reluctance of the BJP . However, it recently came to a head before the Rajya Sabha nominations and the BJP, in a descent, agreed to participate.

Although there are no official data available on the actual strengths of the various castes, all estimates are based on projections from the census of old castes, which was last carried out in 1931. There are often there were demands for it and some initiatives were also taken, but it could not materialize, even as caste remained a primary factor in obtaining the right of electoral arithmetic. The socio-economic census carried out by the UPA government also failed to achieve its objective due to a large number of discrepancies.

Later, Judge Rohini’s Commission proposed a sub-categorization of the Other Backward Caste (OBC) reservation in the government sector. The commission recommended dividing 27% reservation for OBCs into different categories for fair distribution of benefits among different sub-castes to ensure benefits reach truly disadvantaged sections. The commission was established in 2017. After several extensions, it delivered its report, dividing 2,633 OBC castes from the central list into four sub-categories for the distribution of the 27% quota into 2, 6, 9 and 10%.

In 2019, the Legislative Assembly of Bihar passed two government resolutions – one favoring caste census in 2021 and the other for the continuation of the old 200 point list system, which treats the university as the unit, not the 13 point list system which treats the department as a unit.

In 2020, ahead of the state elections, the Bihar Assembly again passed two resolutions – one against the controversial exercise of the National Citizens Register (NRC) in the state and the other for the census based on caste in 2021. They were adopted unanimously.


  • ABOUT THE AUTHOR

    Arun Kumar is deputy editor of the Hindustan Times. He has spent two and a half decades covering Bihar, including political, educational and social issues.
    …See the details

Playing games in NATO, Turkey considers its role in a new world order

0

NATO’s row over Turkey’s opposition to Swedish and Finnish membership goes beyond the expansion of the North Atlantic military alliance. It’s as much about Turkish President Recep Tayyip Erdogan’s immediate political goals as it is about Turkey’s positioning in a new world order of the 21st century.

At first glance, the spat concerns Turkish efforts to obstruct support for Kurdish ethnic, cultural and national aspirations in Turkey, Syria and Iraq and the crackdown on suspected supporters of a preacher who lives in exile in the United States. -United. Turkey accuses the preacher, Fethullah Gulen, of plotting a failed military coup in 2016.

For all the latest news, follow the Daily Star’s Google News channel.

The spat could also be a play for NATO’s second-largest standing army to regain access to US arms sales, especially upgrades for Turkey’s aging fleet of fighter jets. F-16 as well as later more advanced models of the F-16 and top-of-the-line F-35.

Finally, playing the Kurdish card benefits Mr. Erdogan domestically, potentially at a time when the Turkish economy is in the doldrums with an inflation rate of 70%.

The battle over perceived Scandinavian, and primarily Swede, support for Kurdish aspirations involves the extent to which the United States and Europe will continue to crush the road to what is yet another Middle Eastern powder keg.

Mr Erdogan announced this week that Turkey would soon launch a new military incursion against US-backed Kurdish fighters in northeast Syria. Erdogan said the operation would expand the Turkish Armed Forces’ control areas in Syria to a 30-kilometre strip of land along the two countries’ common border.

“The main target of these operations will be areas that are centers of attacks against our country and safe areas,” the Turkish president said.

Turkey says the US-backed People’s Protection Units (YPG), a Syrian militia that helped defeat Islamic State, is an extension of the PKK. The PKK has waged a decades-long insurgency against Turkey, home to some 16 million Kurds. Turkey, the United States and the European Union have designated the PKK as a terrorist organization.

Erdogan accuses Sweden and Finland of giving refuge to the PKK and demands that both countries extradite members of the group. Turkey has not officially released the names of the 33 people it wants extradited, but some have been reported in Turkish media close to the government.

Swedish media reported that a doctor allegedly on the list died seven years ago and was not known to have had ties to the PKK. Another appointee was not resident in Sweden, while at least one other is a Swedish national.

Swedish and Finnish officials were in Ankara this week to discuss Turkey’s objections. Swedish Prime Minister Magdalena Andersson insisted as officials made their way to the Turkish capital that “we do not send money or weapons to terrorist organisations”.

Timely, pro-government media reported on the day the officials arrived that Turkish forces had found Swedish anti-tank weapons in a cave in northern Iraq used by the PKK. Turkey recently launched Operation Claw Lock against PKK positions in the region.

Erdogan’s military plans make it difficult for Sweden and Finland to join NATO. The two Nordic states imposed an arms embargo on Ankara after its first foray into Syria in 2019. The Turkish leader demanded the embargo be lifted as part of any deal on Sweden and Finland joining to NATO.

A new incursion that would cement Turkey’s three-year-old military presence in Syria could also put a damper on improving relations with the United States due to Turkish support for Ukraine and mediation efforts to end to the crisis triggered by the Russian invasion.

Turkey slowed its initial foray into Syria after US President Donald J. Trump threatened to “destroy and obliterate” Turkey’s economy.

The State Department warned this week that a new incursion would “undermine regional stability.”

Boosting arms sales to the United States would go a long way to cementing relations and downplaying Turkey’s acquisition of the Russian S-400 anti-missile system, even though Turkey’s opposition to joining Scandinavian will have a lingering effect on trust. The United States kicked Turkey out of its F-35 program in response to the acquisition.

This week, Erdogan appeared to widen the NATO dispute after Greek Prime Minister Kyriakos Mitsotakis lobbied the US Congress against military sales to Turkey. “Mitsotakis no longer exists for me. I will never agree to meet him,” Erdogan said. He said Mitostakis’ lobbying violated an agreement between the two men “not to involve third countries in our bilateral matters.”

US arms sales would also impact Turkish-Russian relations, although Turkey, unlike most NATO members, will continue to seek to balance its relationship and avoid an open break with Moscow or Washington. .

“Russia’s geopolitical revisionism is poised to bring Turkey and the West relatively closer on geopolitical and strategic issues, provided that Turkey’s current blocking of Sweden’s and Finland’s NATO candidacy be resolved in the not too distant future,” said Turkish researcher Galip Dalay.

Turkey’s bet on NATO is a high-stakes poker game, given that Russia is as much a partner to Turkey as it is a threat.

NATO is Turkey’s ultimate shield against Russian civilizational expansionism. Russian support in 2008 for the irredentist regions of Georgia and the annexation of Crimea in 2014 created a buffer between Turkey and Ukraine and complicated the arrangements between Turkey and Russia in the Black Sea.

Nonetheless, Erdogan risks fueling a debate over Turkey’s NATO membership, just as Prime Minister Victor Orban’s opposition to a European embargo on Russian energy has raised questions about Hungary’s place. in the EU.

“Does Erdogan’s Turkey belong to NATO?” asked former US vice-presidential candidate Joe Lieberman and former senator Mark D Wallace in a Wall Street Journal op-ed. Unlike Finland and Sweden, the two men noted that Turkey would not meet NATO’s democratic requirements if it applied for membership today.

“Turkey is a member of NATO, but under Mr. Erdogan it no longer subscribes to the values ​​that underpin this great alliance. Article 13 of the NATO charter provides a mechanism for members to withdraw Perhaps it is time to amend Article 13 to establish a procedure for expulsion from a member country,” Lieberman and Wallace wrote.

Both men implicitly argued that turning the tables on Turkey would force the complicated NATO member back on track.

Moreover, prominent Turkish journalist and analyst Cengiz Candar warned that “giving in to Ankara’s demands is like letting an autocrat design Europe’s security architecture and shape the future of the Western system.”

Dr James M Dorsey is a Senior Researcher at the Middle East Institute, National University of Singapore and Deputy Senior Researcher at the S Rajaratnam School of International Studies, Nanyang Technological University.

Catskills population grows after years of loss

0

The Center for Economic Growth highlighted these census increases:

GREAT PERFORMANCE
During the year, Saratoga Springs recorded the sixth-largest population gain for a New York City, Moreau the fourth-largest for a city, and Catskill the 15th for a town.

Other fast growers and big winners:

• The biggest winners
City: Saratoga Springs (+134)
Municipality: Moreau (+403)
Village: Catskill (+40)
• Fastest growing
City: Saratoga Springs (+0.5%)
City: Ballston (+2.6%)
Village: Round Lake (3.1%)

PERFORMANCE BY COUNTY
Below are the population highlights for cities, towns, and villages for the eight counties:
• All 32 cities and nine villages in Columbia and Greene counties experienced population growth.
• Four of Albany County’s 10 towns grew in population, led by Guilderland (+163) and Colony (+52).
• Each of Schenectady County’s five towns saw population gains, led by Niskayuna (+78).
• Only two of Saratoga County’s 19 cities experienced zero or negative population growth: Day (0) and Milton (-3).
• Albany recorded the largest population loss in the region (-516), followed by Troy (-290).
• East Greenbush had the region’s largest population loss for a city (-109) and Colony had the largest population loss for a village (-51).

• Queensbury was the only city in Warren County to gain population (+90), although the other 10 saw losses of five or less.
• Each of Washington County’s 17 cities saw population declines, ranging from 1 to 39.

Chromebook 101: How to customize your Chromebook’s desktop

0

Chrome OS isn’t the most feature-rich operating system, but there are a few things you can do to make your Chromebook desktop look and work the way you want.

Ready?

Customize your Chromebook wallpaper

First, let’s cover the basic appearance of your desktop:

  • Right-click anywhere on your Chromebook’s desktop and select Set Wallpaper in the menu that appears.
  • Click on any of Google’s categories to see a selection of pre-made images, or click on the My Pictures option to choose an image from your own local storage.
  • If you want your wallpaper to change to a new image every day, click the Change daily button available at the top of any Google category page. (This option, unfortunately, is currently not available with your own images.)

You can choose from several categories of wallpaper images.

Customize your browser background

You can also customize the page that displays each time you open a new tab in your browser:

  • Open a new tab in Chrome and click on the Customize Chromium (or the pencil icon) in the lower right corner of the browser.

You can customize the background or theme for each new browser page.

  • Select Background to choose an image from Google’s collection or Download from device to select an image from your own local storage, then follow the prompts to find and confirm the desired image.
  • Select Color and theme to change the appearance of your browser’s border and its background. You can choose from a number of predefined themes, or click on the circle with the dropper icon, and you can choose custom colors.

Select a color and theme, or customize your own.

Select a color and theme, or customize your own.

Customize your Chromebook shelf

Finally, take control of the Chrome OS shelf – the row of dock-like shortcuts at the bottom of your screen. Start by selecting exactly the icons that appear in this area:

  • Open your app drawer (by clicking the circle icon in the lower left corner of the screen, then clicking the upward-facing arrow on the partial drawer that appears). Right-click any item in the list and select pin to shelf.

Pin an icon to your shelf to make the app more accessible.

Pin an icon to your shelf to make the app more accessible.

  • If you want to add a website, open the site, click the three-dot menu icon in the upper right corner of Chrome, then select More toolsfollowed by To create a shortcut.

Customize the Chromebook Desktop

You can also pin a website shortcut to your shelf.

If you want the site to open in an app-like window, without the usual browser elements at the top, click the Open as window possibility in the To create a shortcut? pop-up window that appears. Then click on blue Create button.

Customize the Chromebook Desktop

“Open as window” allows you to open the site in an application-like window.

  • Drag and drop any of the icons on the shelf to change their position.
  • Have you decided that you don’t want the icon on your shelf after all? Right click on the icon and select Detach.

Customize the Chromebook Desktop

Don’t want the app on your shelf anymore? Untie it.

And a final pair of possibilities: if you want your shelf to appear on the left or right side of your screen rather than the bottom, right-click anywhere inside it, select Shelf positionthen select Left Where Right. And if you want your shelf to remain hidden by default and only appear when you hover over it, right-click on the shelf and select the icon Auto-hide shelf option.

Customize the Chromebook Desktop

You can move the shelf to either side of your screen.

Updated May 27, 2022, 9:30 a.m. ET: This article was originally published on October 12, 2019 and has been updated to reflect minor changes to the operating system.

Celebrities, Famous Americans Found in 1950 US Census Records

0

In 1950, Charles Lindberg was 48, lived with his family in Fairfield, Connecticut, and listed his occupation as a government aviation consultant.

waltz disney was also 48 years old, resided in Los Angles, California, and indicated that he was the president of a “cinematic cartoon studio”.

Rosa Parks, 37, lived with her husband in Montgomery, Alabama. She did not list an occupation, but her husband Raymond worked in a hair salon.

The trio of notable names, along with personal details about their lives in post-World War II America, are among millions of people whose records are now available with the release of the 1950 US Census.

“There are people that people are already thinking now, and it’s interesting to see aspects that you can’t now,” said Jim Ericson, senior executive at FamilySearch. “It’s fun to see these people and realize that everyone could learn more about their own family.”

Is the 1950 US Census available online?

Since its release on April 1, more than 50% of the 151 million names in the 1950 U.S. Census have been examined as part of an effort to create a searchable digital database of records.

The records for two states – Utah and Nevada – are over. Idaho is 90% screened and several other states are nearing completion, according to Janelle Vasquez, program manager at FamilySearch.

A interactive map on FamilySearch shows the progress of each state.

An interactive map on FamilySearch shows each state’s progress in creating a searchable index of the 1950 U.S. Census.

The 1950 U.S. Census Project was supported by more than 130,000 volunteers, but FamilySearch is asking for more help in two areas.

How to help create a searchable index

First, there are still millions of names to review. Customers can use the App Get involved Where Family Search website to check index names.

“We’re 60% complete reviewing all names in the United States, which means we’ve reviewed 75 million names so far,” Ericson said.

The second task is to review familieswhich means verifying the details listed for each person in a family or household.

Initially, this task was more complicated, but FamilySearch worked with Ancestry to make it simpler and less time-consuming.

“We’ve streamlined the file review process and made it much easier for volunteers,” Ericson said. “We look forward to making the recordings available for free.”

A U.S. census enumerator speaks with a family in Virginia during the 1950 census.

An American census taker speaks with a family in Virginia during the 1950 census.

United States Census Bureau

See more famous names in the 1950 US Census

Here is a list of 24 other recognizable names found in the 1950 U.S. Census and where they lived when enumerated in 1950. The records can be viewed for free with a FamilySearch account.

Notable Celebrities, Artists and Names:

First Presidency of The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints:

More famous people found in the 1950 US Census including Jimi Hendrix, Janis Joplin, Muhammad Ali, Bob Ross, John Denver, John Belushi and others are listed in this article published by Census.gov.

Learn more about the 1950 U.S. Census Project at FamilySearch.org Where Ancestry.com.

The population sequencing market will show positive and steady growth, . – The Daily Val

0

New York, United States:The last Population Sequencing Market The research report provides an overview of all the aspects that have positively or negatively influenced the behavior of the sector and details future ways to help companies and other stakeholders make informed decisions. Guarantee high profits for years to come. It also offers various procedures for dealing with current and future problems in this area.
The document describes in advance each market segment with all the important factors for its growth. It also requires significant historical data like the current industry scenario to discuss the growth path the market and sub-markets are to follow during the forecast period (2022-2028). Furthermore, the report sheds light on the competitive hierarchy in the market and reveals the major competitors and new entrants with their company profiles and strategic development.

Please click on the link below if you intend to make a direct purchase @:-https://www.decisivemarketsinsights.com/population-sequencing-market/16267631/buy-now

Population Sequencing Market Segmentation-
By type:
Kits and tests, platforms, software tools
Per application:
Human health, molecular forensics, blockchain in genomics
By key players: ThermFisher Scientific, Illumina Inc., Pacific Biosciences of California, Inc., Qiagen NV, Oxford Nanopore Technologies, Inc. and Agilent Technologies, Inc., Genuity Science, F. Hoffman La-Roche Ltd., Nebula Genomics, Inc., Helix Opco, LLC, Beijing Genomics Institute and Agilent Technologies, Inc.,

Key points from the content of the Population Sequencing Market report:
Type of product
• Product range: automatic control valve, semi-automatic control valve and manual control valve

Captured market share and captured sales of each product segment
• Estimated growth rate of each product type at the time of analysis

For Sample Copy of Report Visit @ https://www.decisivemarketsinsights.com/population-sequencing-market/16267631/request-sample

Spectrum in the app
• Area of ​​use :
• Industry share and demand for products of each type of application
• Growth of each part of the application during the reference period
Regional land
• Geographical location: North America, Europe, China, Japan, Southeast Asia, India and other regions.
• Cumulative turnover and sales generated in each regional market
• Estimates of regional market growth rates over the reporting period

competition arena
• Analysis of the market concentration ratio
• Detailed information on key players including their product portfolios, production units in regions served and company profiles
• Financial metrics information including pricing model, industry segment, and sales of listed companies
The latest data on expansion, acquisition and merger plans

The main points of the report are as follows.
Market Scope: This section of the report describes key players, market segments, product coverage, product coverage, forecast timeframe, and application statistics.
Executive: This chapter covers all market growth data, market drivers and restraints, current market dynamics and competitive outlook.

In order to make a pre-order request, please click on the link below:-https://www.decisivemarketsinsights.com/population-sequencing-market/16267631/pre-order-enquiry

Manufacturer Portfolio: Detailed portfolio of domestic and overseas manufacturers including SWOT analysis and product details. Regional Analysis: This section describes the latest import and export market trends, export and consumption rates, market leadership in each country, and revenue generation.
To sum up, the report presents an in-depth analysis of the market by systematically examining its various segments. It also examines the industry supply chain in terms of key distribution channels, energy suppliers and end customers to lead companies to successfully launch their products and services.

Please contact us and our expert will get back to you within 30 minutes:
Critical market insights
Sunil Kumar
Head of sales

E-mail – [email protected]
Website – https://www.decisivemarketsinsights.com
United States +18317045538
UK +441256636046
Address: – 26 Broadway, Suite 934, New York, 10004

Social connections:
Twitter-https://twitter.com/decisivemarket

Linkedin-https://www.linkedin.com/company/decisive-markets-insights

How the United States is getting closer to delisting Chinese companies

0
Placeholder while loading article actions

Some big-name Chinese stocks, including Alibaba Group Holding Ltd. and Baidu Inc. face expulsion from the New York Stock Exchange and Nasdaq if they refuse to let US regulators see their financial audits. The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission kicked off the process, constrained by a 2020 law, and investors started paying attention. The same goes for China, which has been scrambling to potentially remove a big hurdle that has stymied U.S. regulators for years.

1. Why does the United States want access to audits?

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, enacted in the wake of the Enron Corp. accounting scandal, required all public companies to have their audits inspected by the US Public Company Accounting Oversight Board. According to the SEC, more than 50 jurisdictions are working with the board to authorize the required inspections, while two have not historically done so: China and Hong Kong. The long-simmering issue has turned into a political one as tensions between Washington and Beijing have escalated under President Donald Trump’s administration. Nasdaq-listed Chinese chain Luckin Coffee Inc. was discovered to have intentionally fabricated part of its 2019 revenue. The following year, in a rare bipartisan move, Congress moved to force action. .

As required by the Holding Foreign Companies Accountable Act, or HFCAA, the SEC in March began publishing its “provisional list” of companies identified as non-compliant. As of May, the list had more than 100 companies, including JD.com Inc., Pinduoduo Inc. and China Petroleum & Chemical Corp. In total, the PCAOB said it was barred from reviewing the audits of more than 200 companies, each of which will face a three-year clock once added to the list. The companies say China’s national security law prohibits them from handing over audit documents to US regulators. SEC Chairman Gary Gensler said in March that Chinese authorities faced “a series of difficult choices.”

3. What is China changing?

In April, the China Securities Regulatory Commission announced it would change a 2009 rule that restricted the sharing of financial data by overseas-listed companies, potentially removing a hurdle. He also said he would provide assistance for cooperation with foreign regulators. Negotiations on the logistics of on-site inspections in China are said to be underway at the end of April. A month later, senior SEC official YJ Fischer spoke of “ongoing and productive discussions” but said “significant issues remain and time is running out quickly.” 4. What is the larger problem?

Critics say Chinese companies enjoy the trading privileges of a market economy – including access to US stock exchanges – while receiving government support and operating in an opaque system. In addition to inspecting audits, the HFCAA requires foreign companies to disclose whether they are controlled by a government. The SEC is also demanding that investors receive more information about the structure and risks associated with the shell companies — known as variable interest entities, or VIEs — that Chinese companies use to list their shares on the New York. Since July 2021, the SEC has refused to green light new listings. Gensler said more than 250 companies already in operation will face similar requirements.

5. How soon can Chinese companies be removed from the list?

Nothing will happen this year or even in 2023, which is why the markets first seized on this possibility in their stride. Under the HFCAA, a company would only be delisted after three consecutive years of non-compliance with audit inspections. He could come back by certifying that he had retained the services of an SEC-certified accounting firm.

6. How many companies will be affected?

There is not much discretion. If a company from China or Hong Kong trades in the United States and files an annual report, it will soon find itself on the SEC’s list simply because those have been identified as non-compliant jurisdictions. In the March interview, Gensler pointed out that the law focuses on non-compliant countries, rather than specific companies.

7. What are investors doing in response?

If a Chinese company listed in the United States also has shares traded in Hong Kong, shareholders have the option of converting their American Depositary Shares (ADS) into Hong Kong shares. Some do just that by handing over the US shares to the custodian bank and asking them to cancel them. The bank then instructs the depository to deliver the Hong Kong common stock to a broker account in the Hong Kong central clearing and settlement system. The process usually takes two business days.

8. Are some Chinese companies really controlled by the government?

Large private companies like Alibaba could probably argue that they are not, although others with substantial public ownership may have a harder time. As of May 2021, the US-China Economic and Security Review Commission, which reports to Congress, had eight “national-level Chinese state-owned enterprises” listed on major US stock exchanges. .

9. Why are Chinese companies listed in the United States?

They are attracted by the liquidity and depth of the investor base of US financial markets, which provide access to a much larger and less volatile pool of capital, in a potentially faster time frame. China’s own markets, though huge, remain relatively underdeveloped. Fundraising for even quality businesses can take months in a financial system constrained by public lenders. Dozens of companies canceled planned IPOs last year after Chinese regulators tightened listing requirements to protect retail investors who dominate stock trading, as opposed to institutional and grassroots investors. of active mutual funds in the United States. And until recently, the Hong Kong stock exchange had a ban on dual-class shares, which are often used by tech entrepreneurs to keep control of their startups after they go public in the United States. It was relaxed in 2018, leading to big listings from Alibaba, Meituan and Xiaomi Corp.

(updates Section 3 with SEC comment)

More stories like this are available at bloomberg.com

GASTAT extends census self-enumeration for another 6 days

0

Saudi Gazette report

Riyadh — The General Authority for Statistics (GASTAT) announced on Wednesday that it has extended the Saudi census 2022 self-enumeration process for another 6 days.

GASTAT said it had extended the self-enumeration data-filling period to the end of Tuesday May 31, instead of ending Wednesday May 25.

He noted that his decision followed requests received from citizens and residents of the Kingdom to extend the deadline for self-enumeration of the 2022 Saudi census.

As for the counting of people through visits by field investigators, GASTAT confirmed that it will continue until the end of the data collection stage, through visits by field investigators to the homes of citizens. and residents.

GASTAT, in cooperation with the Saudi Data and AI Authority (SDAIA), earlier introduced a new feature that helps people verify the census researcher’s identity through their own digital wallet in the app. Tawakkalna.

The authority said that the citizen and resident will have the right to see the identity card of the field researcher, in order to raise the level of transparency and reliability and strengthen the reassurance of families.

It should be noted that the Director General of Social Statistics at the General Authority for Statistics (GASTAT), Dr. Fatimah Aloef, said earlier that the ministry’s concern not to overrule the usual method of enumerating the population by visiting the field researcher, is due to his full awareness of the diversity of society.

There are large segments that still don’t use electronic apps, and that way the field researcher will be able to access, cover and count those segments, she said.

The authority praised citizens’ and residents’ awareness and response to the census and willingness to self-enumerate by filling out the form electronically.

He previously revealed that more than four million citizens and expatriates have so far taken part in the 2022 Saudi census by choosing self-enumeration, since the start of the actual count and data collection on May 10.

Several channels have been made available by GASTAT to help citizens and residents fill in the census form and respond to inquiries, through the Saudi Census 2022 electronic portal: https://survey.saudicensus.sa/enand through the unified number 920020081, in addition to GASTAT’s accounts on social networks.

Having an account in Absher for the head of household is a requirement to access the self-enumeration website, through which the participant can get a quick response code through the Nafath portal, or by registering on the portal of the Saudi census and filling in the required data.

GASTAT also noted that citizens and residents can also fill in their data through self-census stations located in various shopping malls, as it helps individuals and heads of households to fill in the census form with l help from the census employee.

It specified to citizens and residents, through its website, the locations of the self-census stations which can be visited via the following link:

https://saudicensus.sa/sites/default/files/kisosk_locations_en.pdf

The results of the 2022 Saudi census will be announced during the fourth quarter (Q4) of this year, from October 1 to December 31, 2022, GASTAT said.

How companies have embraced the changes and impact on the industry, . – The Daily Val

0

New York, United States: With the help of Market Insights in Universal Population Health Management Solutions Market report launched by Decisive Markets Insights, new products can be launched successfully. Using this market research report, you can gain demographic information about your customers, which is the core of any business. However, it is ensured that customer information remains confidential at all times.

Please click on the link below if you intend to make a direct purchase @:-https://www.decisivemarketsinsights.com/population-health-management-solutions-market/10803697/buy-now

Population Health Management Solutions Market Segmentation-
By type:
Software services
Per application:
Health care providers Health care payers Employer groups Government agencies
By key players: Health Catalyst Wellcentive, Inc. Allscripts Healthcare Solutions, Inc. Cerner Corporation Persivia IBM Corporation Epic Corporation, Inc. International Business Machines Corporation Healthagen LLC UnitedHealth Group i2i Population Health OptumHealth McKesson Corporation Lumeris Conifer Health Solutions, LLC Koninklijke Philips NV Verscend Technologies, Inc. ZeOmega

Reports like this effectively gather, analyze, and interpret market information about a product or service for sale in that market. in victory Population Health Management Solutions Market business report, the attributes of potential customers, their consumption habits, the target market and its needs, and the competition the business faces are examined.

To Get Sample Copy of Report Visit @ https://www.decisivemarketsinsights.com/population-health-management-solutions-market/10803697/request-sample

Almost all major players in the world Population Health Management Solutions Market are represented in the report. Here you will find an overview of company profiles, pros and cons, mergers and acquisitions, market expansion plans, geographic coverage, and product offerings of leading companies in the market. This data will optimize the profit margins of players and other market participants and streamline their business strategies. Our market analysis includes information on market entry barriers and identification of market entry barriers, as well as a measure of Population Health Management Solutions Market competitiveness.

In order to make a pre-order request, please click on the link below:-https://www.decisivemarketsinsights.com/population-health-management-solutions-market/10803697/pre-order-enquiry

Accessing our reports will help you resolve the following issues:

• Do you know the most reliable investment centers?
Return on investment, future demands and profit margins of investment centers are considered in our research. Purchasing our market research will allow clients to target investment centers that are taking off right now.

• What factors should be considered when choosing potential business partners?
We help our clients identify compatible business partners through our research and knowledge.

• Are there any new products being developed that could affect market growth?
The report analyzes the latest technological developments, R&D activities and product launches.

• Have you ever felt uncertain about the future?
We help our clients identify pockets of growth and pockets of revenue by analyzing our research and insights. In doing so, we help them decide whether or not to invest in the growth of their business.

• How can you understand market sentiment?
In order to develop a strategy, it is important to understand market sentiment. You benefit from our insights by seeing the market from a hawk’s eye perspective. The Key Opinion Leaders of each industry that we monitor help us to maintain this observation.

• Understanding market expansion: what do you need to know?
A global Population Health Management Solutions Market An overview is provided in this report, along with a detailed analysis of the products provided by the major players, which helps to assess the expansion of the market.

• Assessing the competitive landscape, what are the opportunities?
the Population Health Management Solutions Market The report analyzes the strategies, geographic locations, and product segments of key market players.

Please contact us and our expert will get back to you within 30 minutes:

Critical market insights
Sunil Kumar
Head of sales
E-mail -[email protected]
Website-https://www.decisivemarketsinsights.com/
United States +18317045538
UK +441256636046
Address:- 26 Broadway, Suite 934, New York, 10004

Social connections:
Twitter-https://twitter.com/decisivemarket

Linkedin-https://www.linkedin.com/company/decisive-markets-insights

Southern Baptists face pressure for public list of sex offenders

0

A scathing report into the Southern Baptist Convention’s mishandling of sex abuse allegations raises the possibility that the denomination, for the first time, will create a publicly accessible database of pastors and other staff at the church known to be abusers.

The proposed database is expected to be one of many recommendations presented to thousands of delegates attending this year’s national meeting, scheduled for June 14-15 in Anaheim, California.

“These recommendations will be open to questions, debate and comment in the meeting room,” said SBC Chairman Ed Litton.

He expressed hope that the shocking findings of the Guidepost report will bring “lasting change” to the SBC, America’s largest Protestant denomination. It has steadily lost members in recent years, while being wracked by internal divisions over race and gender roles.

The Guidepost report said survivors of abuse by SBC clergy have repeatedly shared allegations with the Executive Committee, “to be met, time and time again, with resistance, obstruction and even hostility. plain and simple of some within the EC”.

“Our investigation revealed that, for many years, a few senior EC officials, as well as outside attorneys, largely controlled the EC’s response to these reports of abuse…and focused particularly on the avoidance of liability,” the report said.

The motion for an independent inquiry was brought forward at last year’s national meeting by the Reverend Grant Gaines, senior pastor of Belle Aire Baptist Church in Murfreesboro, Tennessee.

Reading the Guidepost report, Gaines said he was struck by repeated examples of callous disregard for survivors, as well as leaders prioritizing SBC protection from liability over prevention. abuses.

“We’re at a crossroads,” Gaines said. “I think this report provided the information we needed for there to be an outpouring of support to take the right steps.”

Specifically, Gaines said he supports the proposal to create a system that alerts communities to known offenders.

“I think that’s one of the first things we should do,” he said.

Lawyer and writer Christa Brown, who says she was sexually abused as a teenager by her church’s SBC youth minister, has been lobbying the SBC since 2006 to create a publicly available database of known abusers. She was encouraged that Guidepost recommended such a system, but said questions remain about its implementation.

“What is absolutely critical is that the local church cannot function as a survivor’s default or presumed starting place to try to get a clergy sex abuse investigation,” he said. she said by e-mail. “If the local church is seen as a mandatory first stop for survivors to continue their work, then the voices of many survivors will be muffled in their throats before the sound is ever uttered.”

Among the findings of the Guidepost report was that the Executive Committee kept a secret list of hundreds of SBC-affiliated clergy and other personnel identified as sex abusers. Brown said the committee, at a special meeting on Tuesday, should agree to release that list.

“I urge you to release your entire list of pastors and ministers accused of sexual abuse, in whatever form it has been kept for these many years,” Brown tweeted. “Post. This. Now.”

Final decisions on recommendations to submit to Anaheim delegates will be made by the SBC’s Sexual Abuse Task Force, comprised of seven members and two advisors. Its work over the past year has been an emotional journey, said Pastor Bruce Frank, who led the group.

“We saw patterns and things that were deeply concerning,” he said. “Our main job was to allow Guidepost to do its job, and they have done a truly outstanding job over the past nine months looking at events that have happened over 20 years.”

Over the next week, the task force will present formal motions in “precise language,” which will be made public and presented to delegates in Anaheim for a vote, said Frank, senior pastor of Biltmore Baptist Church in Arden. , North Carolina.

Frank said the heart of the task force’s recommendations based on Guidepost’s report can be summed up in two words – prevention and care.

“Our main goal should be to prevent sexual abuse,” he said. “And if abuse happens, how can we care for survivors in a much better pastoral way? How can we communicate better to make sure (the abusers) don’t go from church to church?

He hopes this report will serve as a “catalyst for change”.

“Any impartial person will review the contents of this report and demand that things get better,” Frank said. “SBC is a big family with 48,000 churches. There might be a disagreement on how to improve things. But I am convinced that we will overcome the difficulties.

Besides sexual abuse, the agenda for the Anaheim meeting includes the election of a new SBC chairman to succeed Litton.

One of the main contenders is Bart Barber, a pastor from Farmersville, Texas, who expressed dismay at mean-spirited behavior attributed to some SBC officials in the Guidepost report.

If elected, Barber said in an interview aired Monday, “I pray that God gives me wisdom to know what to do…We are navigating uncharted waters.”

“The job is not done,” he added. “We got the report, but I think everyone in the survivor community that I’ve heard of has said the reports are one thing, but we’ll see if this church family has the courage and determination to ‘to act.

The sex abuse scandal was brought to light in 2019 by a landmark report by the Houston Chronicle and the San Antonio Express-News documenting hundreds of cases at Southern Baptist churches, including several in which the alleged perpetrators remained in ministry.

———

Associated Press religious coverage receives support through the AP’s collaboration with The Conversation US, with funding from Lilly Endowment Inc. The AP is solely responsible for this content.

50 years of MN lawmakers retiring, in part because of the census

0

When the 2022 Minnesota Legislature adjourned for the year on Monday, 51 lawmakers — more than one in five members — cast their final votes in the House and Senate, at least in their current offices.

The 51 retirements mark the largest voluntary turnover in the Legislative Assembly since 1972, when 54 incumbents retired, according to records from the Legislative Reference Library.

Why the big turnover? The main reason is redistricting. The legislature typically experiences the most turnover during election years when incumbents are placed in new districts by court-ordered redistricting maps that reflect population changes.

This year, 22 lawmakers were “twinned” in constituencies with other incumbents. So one of them had to either retire, move to a district with a vacant seat, or face a seated colleague.

A decade ago, 36 state lawmakers retired after redistricting. In 1982, about 40 legislators relinquished their seats. These elections immediately followed a new census at the beginning of a decade, such as this one.

The current crop of retirees includes 16 of 72 women legislators, but four of the seven women giving up House seats are running for the Senate.

Retirements will not result in significant benefits for either major political party. In the Senate, 10 DFLers and eight Republicans are withdrawing, as well as two independents. Two senators are seeking other positions this year.

In the House, 14 Republicans and 12 DFLs are not seeking re-election. But nine of those House Republican members are running for Senate seats this fall, compared to just three Democrats seeking to switch chambers.

Among the lawmakers leaving the Capitol involuntarily are the Senses. Michelle Benson and Paul Gazelka, who resigned to seek Republican gubernatorial endorsement, which went to former Sen. Scott Jensen this month.

SENATE RETREATS

  • Tom Bakk, I-Cook
  • Michelle Benson, Lake R-Ham
  • Karla Bigham, DFL-Cottage Grove (candidate for Washington County Commissioner)
  • Greg Clausen, DFL-Apple Valley
  • Chris Eaton, DFL-Brooklyn Center
  • Kent Eken, DFL-Audubon
  • Paul Gazelka, R-East Gull Lake
  • Michael Goggin, R-Red Winger
  • Jerry Newton, DFL-Coon Rapids (for a House seat)
  • Bill Ingebrigtsen, R-Alexandria
  • Ann Johnson Stewart, DFL-Wayzata
  • Susan Kent, DFL-Woodbury
  • Mary Kiffmeyer, R-Big Lake
  • Melisa Lopez Franzen, DFL-Edina
  • Scott Newman, R Hutchinson
  • David Osmek, R-Mound
  • Julie Rosen, R-Fairmont
  • David Tomassoni, I-Chisholm
  • Patricia Torres Ray, DFL-Minneapolis
  • Chuck Wiger, DFL-Maplewood

RETIREMENT HOME

  • Tony Albright, R-Lac Prior
  • Connie Bernardy, DFL-New Brighton
  • Shelley Christensen, DFL-Stillwater
  • Jim Davnie, DFL-Minneapolis
  • Bob Dettmer, R-Forest Lake
  • Todd Lippert, DFL-Northfield
  • Dale Lueck, R-Aitkin
  • Carlos Mariani, DFL-St. Paul
  • Paul Marquardt, DFL-Glyndon
  • Tim Miller, R-Prinsburg
  • John Poston, R-Lakeshore
  • Steve Sandell, DFL-Woodbury
  • Mike Sundin, DFL-Esko

LEAVING HOME, SEARCHING FOR A SENATE SEAT

  • Ami Wazlawik, DFL-Township of White Bear
  • Cal Bahr, R-East Bethel
  • Liz Boldon, DFL-Rochester
  • Steve Drazkowski, R-Mazeppa
  • Steve Green, R-Fosston
  • Glenn Gruenhagen, R-Glencoe
  • Barb Haley, R-Red Wing
  • Tony Jurgens, R-Cottage Grove
  • Eric Lucero, R-Dayton
  • Kelly Morrison, DFL-Deephaven
  • Jordan Rasmussen, R-Fergus Falls
  • Tama Theis, R-St. Cloud
  • Tou Xiong, DFL-Maplewood

LEAVE HOME, SEEK ANOTHER OFFICE

  • Rena Moran, DFL-St. Paul (Ramsey County Commission)
  • Jeremy Munson, R-Lake Crystal (Congress, 1st District)
  • Nels Pierson, R-Rochester, (Congress, 1st District)
  • Jennifer Schultz, DFL-Duluth, (Congress, 8th district)
  • Ryan Winkler, DFL-Golden Valley (Hennepin County Attorney)

Inside Housing – Insight – The Dawn of For-Profit Housing Providers

0

A study by consultancy Savills this month estimated that for-profit providers will own 141,000 homes by 2027. The agency estimated that over the next five years providers who have already RSH registrants would increase their stock to approximately 111,400 new homes, while new entrants would add an additional 30,000 homes.

Helen Collins, head of Savills’ affordable housing advisory team, expects for-profit companies to take more development risk and be more active in land development. “I think with more partnerships we could see more innovation in the sector.”

She points out that the issues facing associations around the cost of fire safety upgrades and meeting net zero will persist, while inflation and labor shortages are challenges for everyone.

Where investment funds have an advantage is that some hold other assets, such as build-to-let, in addition to their affordable and social housing stock, which means they have the capacity manage risks in the event of a downturn.

“I think it would be nice to see more housing associations and for-profit providers working alongside build-to-let operators and home builders. There’s a lot more to come with partnerships and risk sharing,” she says.

But Ms Collins warns that “just having access to money doesn’t mean you’re going to be a good developer”.

Maggie Rafalowicz, director of Campbell Tickell, agrees that at a time when the sector is once again focusing on the tenant experience and improving existing stock, there is room for more partnerships in new developments.

She predicts that partnerships could emerge between local authorities and for-profit providers. At this time, it appears that these earlier concerns about for-profit affordable housing have not materialized. But one organization has warned that while for-profit companies can inject investment into a sector where it is desperately needed, shareholders’ main goal is to extract value.

“The financialization of social housing is of great concern to me. In the past, many of these companies have acted inconsistently with the right to housing under international law,” says Sam Freeman, research director at The Shift, an organization that supports and advocates for grassroots groups on the right. to housing. “History does not paint a picture of these types of for-profit entities as responsible housing providers.”

For-profit companies go ahead

Population Health Management Software for Healthcare Providers Market Size, Development Data, Analysis and Growth Forecast 2022 to 2028 – Qlik, Cerner, Epic, Allscripts, 3m Health Information Systems, Athenahealth, Optum, Arcadia Healthcare Solutions, Xerox, Advisory Board, Caradigm, Applied Health Analytics

0

the Population Health Management Software for Healthcare Providers The market is globally one of the leading markets involving the development of innovative techniques and an extremely categorized industry. After a thorough investigation conducted on the Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software market industries, the market report provides detailed information, based on the export and import data as well than current industry trends in the global market. The report deeply observes the competitive structure of the global population health management software market for healthcare providers. The Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software market report includes the detailed summary of various competitive companies, manufacturers, organizations and other players who hold major weight in the global market in terms of demand, sales and revenue by providing reliable products and services to customers around the world.

Key players profiled in the report include

Key players covered in Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software report are Qlik, Cerner, Epic, Allscripts, 3m Health Information Systems, Athenahealth, Optum, Arcadia Healthcare Solutions, Xerox, Advisory Board , Caradigm, Applied Health Analytics

Request Sample Report + All Related Charts & Graphs @https://www.maccuracyreports.com/report-sample/192501

The Global Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software Market report provides notable insights into the Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software market by fragmenting the market into different segments. The global Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software market report delivers a comprehensive overview of the market’s global development including its features and forecast. It requires in-depth research studies and analytical power to understand the technology, ideas, methodologies, and theories involved in understanding the market.

Additionally, the report features comprehensive analytical studies of the limiting and growth factors. The report provides a detailed summary of the Population Health Management Software for Healthcare Providers market’s current innovations and approaches, overall parameters, and specifications. The report also gives a comprehensive study of the economic fluctuations in terms of supply and demand.

Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software Market

Cloud-based, on-premises.

Application as below

Large Enterprises (1000+ users), Medium Enterprises (499-1000 users), Small Enterprises (1-499 users)

Apart from this, the report includes the Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software market study based on geographic and regional location. Geographic Segmentation, By Region, North America (US, Canada), South America (Argentina, Chile, Brazil, etc.), Asia-Pacific (India, China, Japan, Singapore, Korea, etc.), Europe (UK, France, Germany, Italy, etc.), the Middle East and Africa (GCC countries, South Africa, etc.) and the rest of the world.

Key Points of the Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software Market:

CAGR of the Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software Market over the forecast period 2020-2026.

Accurate information on the factors that will contribute to the growth of the market over the next six years.

Forecasts of future industry trends and changes in customer behavior.

Prospects of market size and its contribution to the parent market.

The growth and current state of the market in the COVID-19 pandemic situation.

Market competitive landscape analysis and detailed vendor information.

A comprehensive description of the factors that will challenge the growth of market vendors.

The global Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software report indicates the status of the industry and regional and global basis with the help of graphs, diagrams and figures to render it more easier and more understandable.

Please click here today to purchase the full report @ https://www.maccuracyreports.com/checkout/192501

The Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software report supports the facts below:

Historical industry demand trends and future development study Healthcare Management Software market growth rate. The report offers an analysis of the Population Health Management Software for Healthcare Providers industry from 2016 to 2019, based on categories such as product type, applications/end users, and regions.

Market Drivers, Limitations and Opportunities – The market is deeply assessed by the current market situation such as market growth factors and restraints. Additionally, we can discuss the latest industry news and its impact on Population Health Management Software for Healthcare Providers business here.

Industry Chain Analysis – The study of industry chain structure incorporates details related to supplier and buyer information. Furthermore, the report categorizes the major manufacturers of population health management software for healthcare providers on the basis of their production base, cost structure, production process of population health management software, health of the population of health care providers, expenditure on raw materials and expenditure on labor.

Future Project Opportunity – The Healthcare Provider Population Health Management Software market report includes a detailed explanation about the past and present market trends along with its future analysis that may concern with the market growth health care provider population health management software.

Note – To provide a more accurate market forecast, all our reports will be updated prior to delivery considering the impact of COVID-19.

How to create executable applications in Python

0

Used by NASA, ILM, Disney, and hackers, Python is a versatile programming language and an ideal choice for beginners. Whether you’re just creating a “Hello World” or a full application, Python needs an interpreter and a bunch of supporting libraries to work. What if we could create a graphical application, all bundled into a single executable file?

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

With auto-py-to-exe , a project by Brent Vollebregt, we can easily create our own executable Python applications. Below the GUI is PyInstaller, a terminal-based application for creating Python executables for Windows, Mac, and Linux. Veteran Pythonistas will be familiar with how PyInstaller works, but with auto-py-to-exe any user can easily create a single Python executable for their system.

In this tutorial, we will create a Python GUI application using EasyGUI, then use auto-py-to-exe to create a standalone application that will run on any Microsoft Windows system, including systems where Python is not installed. Linux and Mac users will need to use the underlying PyInstaller command line tool. A simple application can be created using a single-line statement. By adding more arguments we can include icons, packaged libraries, etc.

For example here is the code to create a onefile app using app.py as project code.

pyinstaller --onefile app.py

Where auto-py-to-exe differs is that we have an easier way to build an application using a GUI tool.

How to install auto-py-to-exe

1. Open a command prompt by searching for CMD.

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

2. Use the Python package manager pip to install auto-py-to-exe.

pip install auto-py-to-exe

Create a test script

Our sample application is a simple GUI to launch one of three applications. We use the EasyGUI Python library because it abstracts the complexities of building a GUI application. All we need to provide is the logic that drives the application.

1. Open a PowerShell by right-clicking on the Windows icon and selecting PowerShell.

2. Install EasyGUI using pip.

pip install easygui

3. Open a text editor to write the Python test script. We have chosen to use Notepad++but you are free to use your favorite editor.

4. Import two Python modules, easygui and os. Easygui creates the GUI application and the operating system allows the code to interact with the operating system.

import easygui
import os

5. Create two variables, one for a message (msg) to the user while the other becomes the application title.

msg = "Load application..."
title="Tom's Hardware Application Starter"

6. create a list, choices, and inside it store three values ​​which are the names of the applications. Lists are Python arrays. Objects that can store multiple items. Each element has a numeric index, starting at zero.

choices = ["Google Chrome","Slack","PuTTY"]

7. Create an object, Answerto ask the user a question. In this case we are using a buttonbox from EasyGUI, each button is an option of the choices listing. The selected application is stored in the Answer object.

reply = easygui.buttonbox(msg, title,  choices=choices)

8. Use a conditional statement to read the value stored in Answer and compare it to three conditions. The first checks Answer to see if it contains “Google Chrome” if it does, it will open the Google Chrome browser. the boot file requires the use of a full file path to the application. We have to use the double in the path because Python uses to insert illegal characters into a string.

if reply == "Google Chrome":
   os.startfile("C:Program FilesGoogleChromeApplicationchrome.exe")

9. Use another conditional statement to check Answer for the slack.

elif reply == "Slack":
   os.startfile("C:UserslespoAppDataLocalslackslack.exe")

ten. Add another conditional statement to load PuTTY. Note that for PuTTY we use the os.system run as PuTTY is an application registered with Windows path.

elif reply == "PuTTY":
   os.system("putty")

11. Close the conditional test with a other condition to catch any other input.

else:
   print("Done")

12. Save file as app.py in the office. If you’re using an image in the app, make sure the image is also on the desktop.

Complete Example Code List

import easygui
import os
msg = "Load application..."
title="Tom's Hardware Application Starter"
choices = ["Google Chrome","Slack","PuTTY"]
reply = easygui.buttonbox(msg, title , choices=choices)
if reply == "Google Chrome":
    os.startfile("C:Program FilesGoogleChromeApplicationchrome.exe")
elif reply == "Slack":
    os.startfile("C:UserslespoAppDataLocalslackslack.exe")
elif reply == "PuTTY":
    os.system("putty")
else:
    print("Done")

Use auto-py-to-exe

1. Open a command prompt by searching for CMD.

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

2. Run auto-py-to-exe from the prompt.

auto-py-to-exe

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

3. Click Browse and navigate to our sample Python file.

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

4. Configure the application to use a single file. This will condense the application and supporting Python libraries into a single executable file.

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

5. Set the application to be console-based. By doing this we will see all the errors displayed in the command prompt. Once we are satisfied that the application works correctly, we can set it to Window.

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

6. Click the Icon drop-down menu and select an icon for your application. This is an optional step, but it adds an extra level of quality to your application. Icons must be .ico files and we used a 64×64 pixel image as the icon.

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

7. Click Advanced and under -Name, enter the name of your application. We chose the application launcher.

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

8. Scroll down and click CONVERT .PY to .EXE to start the process. It will take a few minutes.

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

9. Click on Open output folder to open the folder containing the application.

(Image credit: Tom’s Hardware)

ten. Double-click the icon to run your application.

Desert Botanical Garden Saguaro Census hopes to count cacti in Phoenix

0

In Phoenix, the summer of 2020 was so hot that even the cacti couldn’t handle it – literally.

In the weeks following August, the hottest summer hottest month on record in a place already notorious for its scorching heat, the Desert Botanical Garden was beset by calls from concerned residents .

The saguaros were falling.

Some had completely toppled over, the thick concertina trunks slamming on the sizzling sidewalks or, in at least one case, a house. Other saguaros offered a less dramatic – though still concerning – manifestation of their internal stress: dropping one of their signature curved arms.

“We still expect to lose saguaros,” said Tania Hernandez, researcher at the Desert Botanical Garden. “But people felt that was not normal.”

It was not normal. In fact, it was a health crisis. And it struck a chord in Phoenix, where people take their saguaros very seriously. The famous cacti are unique to the Sonoran Desert and grow almost exclusively in Arizona and Sonora, Mexico.

“For Arizonans, this is a plant strongly tied to our identity,” Hernandez said. “People really like this plant. They care.

Now, Hernandez hopes to harness that enthusiasm in a community science project with an ambitious goal: find all the saguaros in the Phoenix metro. Dubbed the Saguaro Census, the tally was born out of that terrible time when urban plants fell left, right, and center.

“Everyone felt that it was somehow related to climate change,” Hernandez said. “That’s what our intuition tells us.

“But the truth is, we don’t have enough information to understand what’s going on,” she said. “We don’t even know how many saguaros we have in the cities. We don’t know where they are, how healthy they are. We don’t know how many we lose each year.

And that’s where you come in. But first, a little background.

Iconic Saguaro Cactus: How fast do they grow, how big do they get, and can you cut one?

Why are saguaros so stressed?

The Sonoran Desert is a perfect nursery for baby saguaros. The heat is the right temperature and the annual monsoon rains provide the right amount of humidity. The existing plants – mesquites and palo verdes – act as “nursing trees” for the budding saguaro giants.

“It’s a life cycle for saguaros,” Hernandez said. “They are protected from the sun and the temperatures thanks to the nourishing tree. They keep growing, growing, growing to a point where they outgrow the tree and the tree dies and the saguaro thrives.

For cacti young and old, she says, the Sonoran Desert is “the perfect setting for saguaros to grow, survive, and live.”

But in the heat island of Phoenix, life is different. There is concrete. Air pollution. Higher temperatures. Saguaros are more likely to have been transplanted than to take root in the wild.

Add to that the “nonson” of 2020, the driest summer rainy season on record, and the massive saguaro drop starts to make sense.

While the calls about the cactus dropping have slowed, Hernandez said, there are still regular reports of sick saguaros.

Some are too thin. Others don’t bloom as they should. Many suffer from bacterial necrosis, its telltale ugly gashes marking trunks that were once a healthy, rubbery green.

Not all damage to cacti is caused by disease. Hungry javelin squads occasionally nibble on saguaros. There are instances of vandalism, although the census so far suggests they are rare.

Hernandez thinks sick plants can be in a state of great distress because of their environment.

“Their immune system, because plants have an immune system, may be weaker, may be weak, because the plant is facing this great stress, pollution, high temperatures,” she said, ” and the plants might not be able to heal for if they were healthy.

Saguaro: Will the iconic cactus begin to disappear from parts of the Southwest?

Finding saguaro ‘twins’ could be the key

For better or worse, genetic testing companies like 23andMe have built huge databases of people willing to hand over their DNA.

Now Hernandez wants to do the same for saguaros.

The census will not stop at documenting the number, location and condition of the saguaros scattered throughout the Phoenix metro. Part of the project will involve obtaining DNA from urban saguaros in an effort to trace their origins.

Most of the saguaros in the city of Phoenix were transplanted from long-forgotten wild areas, Hernandez said. “These plants are so old that in most cases people have no idea where the plant came from.”

Hernandez and his team have already taken DNA samples from saguaros ranging from northern Phoenix to southern Sonora and plan to sequence them.

This summer, they’ll sample city saguaros in hopes of finding a mate. Hernandez is looking for people with saguaros on their property who are happy to offer the cacti for sampling.

“We want to identify the closest relative of urban plants so we can compare. How do they cope with their high stress in the city, compared to a sister plant in the wild? she says.

“It’s a similar approach to comparing twins who grow up in different conditions.”

The saguaros growing in urban areas of Phoenix are a huge natural experiment, Hernandez said, that would take a lot of time and money to replicate.

“If we were to artificially study the effect of climate change on saguaro plants, we would need to bring wild plants, put them in a very special, high-tech greenhouse, and grow them there for years. Raise the temperature with a lot of energy,” she said. “However, we naturally have them here in the city.”

This accidental experience could have two major benefits.

First, take a slow-growing urban cactus. Its slow progression could be due to high temperatures driven by climate change, for example, or urban pollution. Or it could just be genetic. In isolation, there is no way of knowing. But finding a sister plant could unlock the answer.

Second, it could save the Phoenix Metro saguaros. “Ultimately, we’d like to propose that we can adapt our urban saguaro population,” Hernandez said. “We can adapt it to future conditions by bringing saguaros here that are already adapted to nature’s driest and hottest conditions.”

But we have to start now.

“Because we have to remember that these plants take many, many years to grow. So if we don’t start now, our children or grandchildren won’t see saguaros in the city. »

How you can help

Participating in the saguaro census is easy.

First, download the iNaturalist app. The free app, developed by National Geographic and the California Academy of Sciences, allows the public to observe and upload information about the living things around them to other nature lovers and biologists around the world.

Second, create an account and search for the Metro Phoenix Saguaro Census project.

Third, document any saguaros you see in the city of Phoenix.

“You take a picture of the saguaro, even if the picture is not good, even if you’re in your car and passing by, that’s fine, because we want to generate a database of saguaros in the city,” said Hernández.

“If you haven’t looked closely, like to assess the health of the plant or the size of the plant, that’s okay. We can go back and take more data on that same plant,” she said.

“But the important thing is how many we have and where they are.”

The best thing about saguaros

Hernandez completed her doctorate in cactus evolution in Mexico, home to the greatest diversity of cacti in the world.

For her, the best thing about saguaros is their ability to inspire.

“Culturally, it is a very important species. It’s not endangered in the wild, it’s quite successful, abundant, it’s not threatened,” she said.

“Some cactus species are more endangered than the panda or the white rhinoceros. But people don’t know that.

“What I love about saguaro is that this plant, this cactus, is so important to people that we can use it to (raise awareness) about the conservation of other cacti.”

The Saguaro Census

The Saguaro Census is running through May 2022. For more details on how you can get involved, visit dbg.org/saguarocensus2022.

Those interested in nominating saguaros on their property for further study can contact Dr. Tania Hernandez at [email protected]

Contact the reporter at [email protected] Follow her on Twitter @lanesainty.

More than half of the US population will experience 90-degree heat this weekend – YubaNet

0



May 20, 2022 – The past eight years have been the hottest on record anywhere in the world. With summer 2021 being the hottest on record in the United States and extreme heat starting early in 2022, it’s clear that the summer months in the northern hemisphere are increasingly a “dangerous season.” for human and critical health. ecosystems. According to NOAA, this summer will likely be warmer across the country than in years past.

Places across the United States and around the world are experiencing record or deadly heat long before the official start of summer this year. This weekend, more than half of the US population will experience temperatures at or above 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Temperatures are expected to reach 99 degrees Fahrenheit in Massachusetts. More than a dozen US states have experienced unseasonable spring heat waves since April. India and Pakistan are also currently experiencing a prolonged, weeks-long deadly heat wave in which temperatures topped 122 degrees Fahrenheit.

Additional resources and analysis:

  • A 2022 peer-reviewed study titled “Too Hot to Work,” which found that without global action to reduce heat-trapping emissions, climate change is expected to quadruple the exposure of American outdoor workers to hot conditions hazardous, endangering their health and placing up to $55.4 billion of their income at risk by 2065. To view the interactive mapping tool, click here.
  • A 2019 peer-reviewed study titled “Killer Heat,” which found that without global action to reduce heat-trapping emissions, the number of days per year when the temperature “felts” exceeds 100 degrees Fahrenheit would increase than doubling from historic levels to an average of 36 across the United States at mid-century and quadrupling to an average of 54 by the end of the century. To get results for a specific city or county, use the online widget. To consult the interactive mapping tool, click here.
  • A 2019 UCS report titled “Farmworkers at Risk,” which assessed the risks that pesticide exposure and heat stress can pose to the safety of American farmworkers.
  • A science fact sheet linking extreme weather events, like extreme heat, and climate change.

The Union of Concerned Scientists puts rigorous, independent science to work solving our planet’s most pressing problems. By partnering with people across the country, we combine technical analysis and effective advocacy to create innovative and practical solutions for a healthy, safe and sustainable future. For more information, visit www.ucsusa.org.

Eye care in health systems: action guide

0

Insight

To address many of the challenges faced in eye car